Poudre Fire Authority Driver/Operator Manual
Transcript of Poudre Fire Authority Driver/Operator Manual
Poudre Fire AuthorityDriver/Operator
ManualThird Edition – March 2006
Copyright © 2006 Poudre Fire AuthorityFort Collins, Colorado
http://www.poudre-fire.org
Introduction
ii
Introduction
iii
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Driving Poudre Fire Authority Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . 1
Driving Poudre Fire Authority ApparatusDriving ConditionsOpticoms
Vehicle Accidents
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Poudre Fire Authority Hydraulics History Formulas History of Friction Loss by Rule-of Thumb Calculating Friction Loss by Rule-of-Thumb Quick Reference Charts More Rule-of-Thumb Tender Shuttle Calculations Drafting Calculating Class “B” Foam by Rule-of-Thumb Relay Pumping Operations Calculating Back Pressure Calculating Additional Water Availabe from Hydrant Solid Stream Nozzles Master Streams Danger Signals When Operating Pumps Pump Gauges Tell You More Than Meets The Eye Hydrants Bresnan Distributor Automatic Fog Nozzles Buildings Equipped With Fire Pumps Fire Department Connections
Fire Hydraulics Data
Apparatus Inspection Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operations Policy 1 – Apparatus Inspections Equipment Maintenance Vehicle Fluids
Introduction
iv
Driver/Operator Rodeo Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Driver/Operator Rodeo Course Layout Driver/Operatpr Rodeo Course Instructions Rodeo Course Scoring and Rules Special Provisions Straight Line Offset Alley Serpentine Alley Dock Parallel Park Diminishing Clearance
Appendix . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Note – Appendix is only available with station copies and PFA intranet version of this manual. Individual Individual Individual issued manuals do not include appendix.
PFA Apparatus Specifi cs Websites to Visit NFPA 1002 Standard on Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations (2003 Edition)
Liability of Public Employees Operating Fire and Medical Emergency Vehciles (Revised December 2005) Jacobs Engine Brake Operating Detroit Diesel Electronic Fire Commander Task Force Tip – Automatic Handline Nozzles Task Force Tip – In-Line Foam Eductor Manual Task Force Tip – Using Automatic Nozzles with Foam Eductors Task Force Tip – Blitzfi re Monitor Operators Manual TurboDraft Operators Manual
Introduction
v
Driver Operator Introduction
The fi re service is a dynamic environment that is infl uenced by many factors in-cluding technology, law, equipment, and science. As the environment changes, so will our own practices relating to the art of the Driver/Operator (D/O). This book will need to be updated periodically as our department adopts new technology and practices that improve our ability to meet the challenges of the job.
Maintaining the high quality of PFA’s D/Os requires participation from PFA’s D/Os, Captains, the Training Division, and the Operations Team.
The PFA Operations Division is responsible to set policies pertaining to D/Os and to develop acceptable and expected practices for D/Os operating on or off the fi re scene. Changes in apparatus or equipment must be addressed, particularly in terms of how these changes will impact the work of the D/O. The Operations Division should also be able to identify trends or changes in standards that affect the work of the D/O.
The PFA Training Division is responsible for keeping D/O’s updated on important and pertinent changes in the technology, equipment, laws, and practices as PFA adopts them. Additionally, it will continue to offer training and test fi refi ghters who wish to become D/Os. The Training Division will provide the standards and expectations to the candidates and assist in developing study materials and practice sessions for D/O candidates. This manual is also available as part of a computer-based training program with links to web sites to provide numerous resources for continuing education.
DO candidates are responsible for attending appropriate classes and to thoroughly prepare themselves for testing through the use of written materials and other resources, as well as through personal and company practice.
Finally, PFA D/Os are in the best position to impact their jobs and create an atmosphere of excellence. The material in this book is the baseline of PFA opera-tions. Those who perform at this level will do a good job. Beyond this book are vast resources and experiences which can enhance every D/O’s performance. It is the responsibility of the D/O to seek those opportunities and to apply them to this job and to seek changes in existing practices where he or she sees a benefi t to the department.
This latest version of the Poudre Fire Authority Driver/Operator Manual has signifi cant changes. First the certifi cation process has been removed from the manual and will be available from the Poudre Fire Authority (PFA) Intranet. Second, this manual will reference NFPA 1002 Standard on Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations (2003 edition) when applicable. It will also reference PFA Operational Directives (OD’s) and Policies in existence at the time of this writing.
http://sparky/policies/training-policies/tx02_do_ado.pdf
PFA Training Policy #2 — Driver/Operator Certifi cation and Acting Driver/Operator Program
http://sparky/policies/training-policies/tx01_certification.pdf
PFA Training Policy #1 — Certifi -cation for Firefi ghter, Driver/Op-erator and Company Offi cer
Note — PFA Note — PFA Policies and OD’s can only be Policies and OD’s can only be accessed from the internal PFA network
Introduction
vi
Chapter One
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 1.4 and 4.2
DrivingPoudre Fire Authority
Apparatus
Driving Poudre Fire AuthorityApparatus
2
Chapter One
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 1.4 and 4.2
Driving Poudre Fire Authority Apparatus
The objective of this chapter is to educate PFA D/Os on the details of driving PFA fi re apparatus and related issues during both emergent and non-emergent conditions.
“The fi re apparatus driver/operator is responsible for safely transporting fi re-fi ghters, apparatus, and equipment to and from the scene of an emergency.”1
Individual maturity and common sense, along with laws, NFPA standards, PFA departmental policies and ODs, assist with determining what a safe and effi cient manner is.
“Laws are rules that are legally binding and enforceable. Of particular interest to pump operators are laws enacted at the state and local level. These laws can affect pump operators on an almost daily basis. A major focus of these laws tends to be on emergency-vehicle driving regulations. Standards are guidelines that are not legally binding or enforceable by law unless they are adopted as such by a governing body.”2 PFA departmental policies and OD’s refl ect cur-rent laws and standards.
The PFA D/O is faced with many challenges while driving a fi re apparatus These challenges are amplifi ed during inclement weather, heavy traffi c, or mountain driving. Add the element of emergenency driving and the associ-ated risks are exponential. To limit the risk associated with these challenges, PFA uses a systematic approach to D/O training, and vehicle inspection. The individual D/O must have extensive knowledge of PFA Policies, OD’s, and apparatus/equipment.
The PFA sponsors an Acting Driver/Operator Academy for future PFA D/Os. This is the fi rst step to becoming a PFA Acting D/O. After successfully com-pleting this training, the next step is to become an Acting D/O. During this period, the Acting D/O may function as a D/O and if he/she chooses, prepare to become a regular D/O.
All D/Os (acting or regular) are required to inspect their vehicle when report-ing to duty, after incidents, and after repairs. Additionally, a daily inspection form is to be completed for all fi rst-line equipment. The objectives of these inspection forms are; to complete the requirement of NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations (2003 Edition),3
to document needed repairs, and to protect the safety of the driver and crew as-signed to the apparatus. Finally, a proper inspection and completed inspection form protects both the PFA and the individual D/O from exposure to unneces-sary liabilities.
http://sparky/policies/ODs/Section3/BACKING.pdfPFA Operational Directive — Ap-paratus Backing
http://sparky/policies/OHSC/Ohsc1.pdfPFA Occupational Health and Safety Policy Manual
Note — PFA Note — PFA Policies and OD’s can only be Policies and OD’s can only be accessed from the internal PFA network
3
Driving Poudre Fire AuthorityApparatus
The PFA D/O is not only responsible for safely transporting fi re fi refi ghters, apparatus, and equipment to and from an emergency scene, but also, for rou-tine daily operations. While the D/O is responsible for the operation of the ap-paratus, his/her offi cer is responsible for the actions of the D/O. Guidelines for emergency/non-emergency driving have been established by the PFA. These guidelines refl ect NFPA 1500 Standard on Fire Department Occupational Safety and Health Program and can be found in the Poudre Fire Authority Occupational Health and Safety Policy Manual, chapter 3.4 It is important for the PFA D/O or acting D/O to be familiar with the information in chapter three of the above mentioned manual. See the PFA Intranet site for complete details regarding this chapter.
Driving Conditions
PFA D/Os are expected to drive in all types of driving conditions. These condi-tions include city, mountain, and winter driving. While city driving is the most common, occasionally PFA D/Os respond to mountain areas.
Road conditions in mountain areas vary greatly and the D/O needs to know the limitations of his/her apparatus prior to encountering these situations.
The PFA D/O is also expected to be skilled at driving in winter conditions. Tire chains are provided for most apparatus. D/Os should be profi cient at installing chains on tires and driving with the same. Don’t wait for the snow to fall to learn this skill.
Most PFA apparatus are also equipped with “Jake Brakes”.5 It’s important to know that the “Jake Brake” works best on dry roads. Also, most PFA apparatus now have ABS. Jake Brakes are designed to automatically turn off if the ABS sensor detects a skid.
Finally, wheel chocks are carried on all apparatus and should be used when conditions warrant such as when parked on grades or when a PFA engine is in pump mode. NFPA 1901 Standard for Automotive Fire Apparatus (2003 Edition), requires “two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, each designed to hold the apparatus, when loaded to its maximum in-service weight, on a 10 percent grade with the transmission in neutral and the park-ing brake released. It also also states “when the fi re apparatus is loaded to its maximum in-service weight, the parking brake system shall hold the apparatus on at least a 20 percent grade.”
4
Chapter One
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 1.4 and 4.2
Opticoms
PFA Engines, Trucks, and Battalion 1 are equipped with opticoms manufactured by 3M.7 In June of 2006 Poudre Valley Hospital Ambulance Service will also begin utilizing this system. The opticom consists of an emitter (mounted on the apparatus and a detector (usually mounted on the traffi c signal cross arm).
The intent of this device is to optimize traffi c fl ow during an emergency response. In the PFA district, PFA apparatus are given the right-of-way by controlling traffi c lights. When the opticom is activated, the emitter transmits an infrared signal to the detector which captures control of the traffi c light and turns it green affi c light and turns it green affi c light and tfor the direction of the emergency response vehicle. All other directions for the intersection will show a red light.
The following instructions refer to opticoms:
• Each opticom is assigned to the apparatus it is installed on. The City of Fort Collins Traffi c Department tracks opticom activations by apparatus with a day/time stamp.
• Opticoms operate from a range of 500' to 1000' depending upon; 1) how clean the emitter is, 2) how clean the detector is, 3) obstructions between emitter and detector (i.e. tree branches).
• At speeds above 45 mph, the opticom may not be able to trigger a green light before the apparatus reaches the intersection.
• As the traffic light is captured the opposing lanes get a yellow signal. The length of the signal is dependent on the size of the intersection.
• If traffictraffictraf light is captured j light is captured j light is captured ust after it turns red, or pedestrian button is activated, the light will take time to cycle, thus allowing for pedestrians to exit walkway.
• If you cannot capture and turn a traffic light green for your direction, assume a pedestrian has activated the crosswalk button, or another emergency response vehicle has captured the traffic light from another direction.
• The opticom will only hold an intersection for 90 seconds before it recycles.
• Opticoms are wired to turn off when the parking brake is set.
Not all intersections have opticom detectors and new detectors are being and new detectors are being andinstalled as funds allow. D/Os need to learn which intersections are epuipped with opticom detectors. If an opticom fails notify the PFA Special Operations Chief.
5
Driving Poudre Fire AuthorityApparatus
Vehicle Accidents
All accidents are investigated at PFA. Vehicle accident rates are low but they do occur. Table 1-1 represents a cause of accidents involving PFA vehicles over a 10-year average.8
Table 1-1 – Poudre Fire AuthorityCauses of Vehicle Accidents over 10-year average
Misjudgments 12
Equipment Failure .7
Backing 4.3
Failure to Yield to Emergency Vehicle .3
Fault of other Driver 2.8
Other 2.8
Total 17.3
Although PFA has not experienced a fatal vehicle accident, they do happen in the fi re service. According to a Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) report titled Safe Operation of Fire Tankers (April 2003) excessive speed and lack of seat belt use is cited in a majority of fi re tanker fatality acci-dents.9 This report examines 38 case studies involving fatal fi re tanker crashes from 1990 to 2001. Of these 38 case studies, excessive speed was a contribut-ing factor in 21 incidents and lack of seat belt use was an contributing factor in 28 of the incidents. This report also states:
1) Three out of four people who are ejected from a ve- hicle will die. 2) Eight out of ten fatalities in rollover accident involve occupant ejection from the vehicle. 3) Occupants are 22 times more likely to be thrown from the vehicle in a rollover accident when they are not wearing their seatbelts.
6
Chapter One
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 1.4 and 4.2
The Poudre Fire Authority Occupational Health and Safety Policy Manual, chapter chapter cha III, section II, states “Drivers will not move a vehicle until such time all persons on the vehcile are seated and properly secured. Personnel will not dismount a vehicle until it has come to a complete stop.”10
Finally, The most important safety tool you have is your own judgement. While driving a fi re apparatus, there are many dangers—like hazardous weather, dangerous road conditions and/or routes to the scene of an incident, reckless driving by the public—that you can’t control. But human error causes the vast majority of accidents in the PFA. The dangers that a member of the fi re service can’t control make it all the more important to be aware of the factors you can control. The most crucial, though deceptively simple, precaution you can take as a D/O for yourself, your crew members, and the family you go home to, is to make sure you and your riders fasten your seatbelts.
7
Driving Poudre Fire AuthorityApparatus
Notes
1 Michael Wieder et al. el Wieder et al. el Wieder et “IFSTA Pumping Apparatus Driver/Operator Handbook”, Fire Protection Publications, Oklahoma State
University, Stillwater, Oklahoma, 1999. p.3.
2 Thomas Sturtevant, “Introduction to Fire Pump Operations”, 2nd ed., Delmar nd ed., Delmar nd
Publisher, Albany, NY, 1997. p. 15.
3 “National Fire Protection Association 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations”, 2003 ed., section 4.2.1.
4 “Poudre Fire Authority Occupational Health and Safety Policy Manual”, Fort Collins, Colorado, 2001. pp. 20-24
5 For more information on Jake Brakes, see http://www.jakebrake.com
6 “National Fire Protection Association 1901 Standard for Automotive Fire Apparatus”, 2003 ed., section 5.8.3 and 12.3.1.6.2.
7 For more information on 3M Opticoms, see http://www.3m.com
8 Data from PFA Health and Safety Offi cer, 2006.
9 “Federal Emergency Management Agency Publication Safe Operation of Fire Tankers”, 2003 ed. http://www.fema.gov
10 “Poudre Fire Authority Occupational Health and Safety Policy Manual”, Fort Collins, Colorado, 2001. pp. 20-24
8
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Hydraulics
Hydraulics
10
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Poudre Fire Authority Hydraulics
Once fi re apparatus have arrived on the scene of a fi re, the primary goal of the PFA D/O is to provide an effective and safe stream for each hose line he/she is charged with. Understanding the PFA hydraulic system is a key factor in attaining this goal.
History
During the late 1970’s and early 1980’s, PFA existed as two different fi re departments. Both departments operated with similar hydraulic systems. Hose streams consisted of 1½-inch and 2½-inch hose with Akron Brass variable gallonage nozzles for attack lines, master streams and 5-inch supply line. Fire- ground hydraulics were calculated from formulas.
In the early 1980’s these two departments merged and the PFA was born. Un-merged and the PFA was born. Un-mergedder the direction of one administration, PFA made several changes regarding hydraulic equipment and procedures for PFA D/Os. The fi rst PFA Driver/Op-erator Study Guide was written in 1982 by Kevin Wilson who was the training offi cer at that time. This comprehensive manual has provided the framework for other manuals up to and including this one. Additional changes also oc-curred during the 1980’s. For example rule-of-thumb fi reground calculations replaced formulas. The drop ten rule-of- thumb method was introduced. Soon after 1¾-inch hose with nozzles made by Task Force Tip (TFT) were added to the PFA arsenal. TFT assisted the PFA with modifi cation of the rule-of-thumb by dividing the fi nal 1½-inch calculation by two. Around the late 1990’s PFA also adopted the use of three-inch hose.
Presently, the PFA hydraulics system uses a combination of formulas, rule-of-thumb calculations, and quick reference charts to determine water delivery rates and pressures. The methods of water delivery are as follows:
1) Water Supply Lines:
This includes hose lines that supply water coming into the engine from a hydrant, tender, or draft as well as water supplied to another engine via relay pumping operations. It also includes, the extension of hose lines that exceed the limits defi ned in the PFA quick reference charts.
2) Solid Stream Nozzles:
These include all solid stream nozzle tips for 2½-inch nozzles and straight tips for Blitz Fire nozzles or master streams.
11
Hydraulics
3) PFA Quick Reference Charts:
These charts were derived from actual fl ow measurements conducted by the PFA Hose and Nozzle Committee. They are limited to friction losses from TFT automatic fog nozzles, 1-inch straightbore nozzles on 1¾-inch highrise hose, and 5-inch hose friction loss. These test were conducted in the late 1990’s.
Formulas
Formulas are tools for determining just what has occurred or will occur in water-moving evolutions. Each time any one condition in a hose layout with water fl owing is changed, nearly every other condition changes also. Formulas provide a means of calculating these changing conditions.
Questions brought up by actual water use may be answered by using these for-mulas. Their greatest value is in pre-fi re planning and determining the means of getting the most from the available water supply and pumpers.
While computations by other than a few simple formulas are not practical on the fi reground, the D/O who knows how to solve hydraulic equations and who understands the principles involved, can mitigate problems and estimate fairly accurately the pumping requirements at a fi re.
The formulas used here have all been derived from actual water-fl ow tests. To simplify the formulas, some minor items (such as extended decimals) which would have a slight effect on the outcome of the problem, have been dropped. Also constants have been rounded off.
In working formulas, details of units are important. Some of these details are listed below:
• Measure all pressures and pressure losses is in pounds per square inch (psi).
• Some formulas refer to hose in 100' lengths. Others refer to 50' lengths. Be sure to use the correct variable
• Gallons per minute sometimes refers to hundreds of gpm and other times in total gallons. Be sure which is needed.
• When fi nding the capacity of containers, keep dimensions either in cubic inches or in cubic feet. Do not mix.
• Choose the correct formula for the problem at hand. When more than one formula is involved, be sure to work each in proper sequence.
12
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Friction Loss Coeffi cients for a Single Line
Hose Diameter Hose Diameter Hose Diameter Coeffi cient Coeffi cient
and Type (C)
1½" rubber-lined ----------------------------------------------------------------------24.0
1¾ 1¾ 1¾" rubber-lined with 1½"couplings ---------------------------------------------15.5
2½ 2½ 2½" rubber-lined ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.0
3 3 3" rubber-lined with 2½" couplings ------------------------------------------------ 0.8
5 5 5" rubber-lined ------------------------------------------------------------------------0.08
Required Formulas
Friction Loss Formula:
Where: FL = Friction Loss in PSI C = Friction Loss Coeffi cient (From Table) Q = Flow rate in hundreds of GPM L = Hose length in hundreds of feet
Q = Fow rate in hundreds of GPM GPM = Actual fl ow through hose 100 = A constant
L = Hose length in hundreds of feet Hose Length = Actual length of hose 100 = A constant
FL = CQ2L
Q = GPM ÷ 100
L = Hose Length ÷ 100
13
Hydraulics
Gallons Per Minute
(GPM from Diameter and Pressure)
(Flow from Friction Loss)
Nozzle Diameter
(Nozzle Diameter from Flow)
Nozzle Pressure
(Nozzle Pressure From Flow)
GPM = 29.7D2√NP√NP
Q = .5√2FL - .25√
ND = √ GPM 29.7√NP√√ √
NP = ( GPM )2
29.7D2
Nozzle Reaction
(For Solid Stream Nozzles)
(For Fog Nozzles)
Conversions
P = .434 X H (P = pressure in psi.) H = 2.31 X P (H = height in feet.)
1 Cubic Foot Of Water ---------------------------------------- 1728 Cubic Inches1 Cubic Foot Of Water ------------------------------------------------1 Cubic Foot Of Water ------------------------------------------------1 Cubic Foot Of Water 62.5 Pounds 1 Cubic Foot Of Water -------------------------------------------------1 Cubic Foot Of Water -------------------------------------------------1 Cubic Foot Of Water 7.5 Gallons 1 Gallon Of Water ----------------------------------------------------- 8.33 Pounds
NR = 1.5D2NP
NR = .5GPM
14
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
History of Friction Friction F Loss by Rule-of-Thumbof-Thumbof
PFA uses the “drop-ten” method of rule-of-thumb calculations. This method is derived from the friction loss formula 2Q2+Q established in 1939. This formula worked only for 2½-inch hose. The “drop-ten” method was developed as a con-version factor for use with other size fi re hoses. While there was always a margin of error with this method, it was within acceptable limits. During the 1970’s, fi re hose technology improved signifi cantly. Due to these improvments, the fi re servihose technology improved signifi cantly. Due to these improvments, the fi re servihose technology improved signifi cantly. Due to these improvments, the fi re ser ce developed a new friction loss formula of CQ2L. This new formula for calculating friction loss decreased the resulting error to acceptable limits. However, because rule-of-thumb friction loss, was still derived from the old formula (2Q2+Q), its error margin continued to increase.
Previous D/O manuals describe the rule-of-thumb friction loss calcualtions as acceptable for all fi re hose handlines. For reasons discussed above and later in scussed above and later in scussed athis chapter, rule-of-thuhis chapter, rule-of-thuhis chapter, rule-of mb friction loss calculations are now only acceptable for two of the three PFA water delivery systems. These two systems are water supply lines and solid stream nozzles, 2½-inch or larger.
In 1999, PFA purchased new handline nozzles from Task Force Tips (TFT). The technology in these new automatic nozzles increased the friction loss error to an unacceptable level when using the rule-of-thumb method. The PFA Hose and Nozzle Committee conducted fl ow tests with the new nozzles. They determined with the increased available fl ow these nozzles provide, the rule-of-thumb formula had a higher than acceptable margin of error. The committee developed quick reference charts for these nozzles which determine the pump pressure needed to deliver various gpm fl ows with different hose lengths. The PFA Operations Team approved these changes. The quick reference charts will be discussed later in this chapter.
Another factor that increases the margin of error for the rule-of-thumb calcula-tions is the increased fl ows through hose lines. For example until recently there were three distinct and separated gpm fl ow rates (fi gure 2-1).
1½" Hand Line60 to 125 GPM
2½" Hand Line200 to 300 GPM
Master Stream400 GPM
and higher
fi gure 2-1
15
Hydraulics
Presently the fi re service is fl owing more gpm through equal or similar size hose lines. Today at PFA, including 1½-inch hose carried on wildland apparatus, there are fi ve overlaping gpm fl ow rates. These increased options for fl ow also add to These increased options for fl ow also add to These increasedgreater margin of error resulting from rule-of-thumb calculationsgreater margin of error resulting from rule-of-thumb calculationsgreater (fi gure 2-2).
The reason for this increased margin of error can be found with an understand-ing of the principles of friction loss.
Principles of Friction Loss
There are four basic principles of friction loss.1 These principles are as fol-lows:
1) If all other conditions are the same, friction loss varies directly with the length of the hose or pipe.
2) When hoses are the same size, friction loss varies approxi- mately with the square of the increase in the velocity of the fl ow.
3) For the same discharge, friction loss varies inversely as the fi fth power of the diameter of the hose.
4) For a given fl ow velocity, friction loss is approximately the same, regardless of the pressure on the water.
These principles are explained completely in most fi re service hydraulics books. These books can be obtained from the PFA Training Division Library.
Blitz Fire300 to 500
GPM
fi gure 2-2
2½"Hand Line200 to 350
GPM
Master Stream300 GPM
and higher
1½"Hand Line60 to 125
GPM
1¾"Hand Line100 to 200
GPM
16
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
The following rule-of-thumb method allows the D/O to calculate friction loss from the gpm fl ow and is applicable to water supply lines and, solid stream nozzles (except for the 1-inch straight tip on highrise hose). The rule-of-thumb method can be modifi ed to apply to other hose sizes as well.
Calculating Friction Loss By Rule-of-thumb
Rule-of-Thumb for 2½-inch fi re hose: An application of the rule-of-thumb method is made for 100' of 2½-inch fi re hose. A fi refi ghter needs to know only of 2½-inch fi re hose. A fi refi ghter needs to know only ofthe fl ow in gpm from a nozzle (see table 2-1). In this case, 250 gpm, the zero is dropped leaving 25. Then by subtracting 10 from 25, a suffi ciently accurate fric-tion loss of 15 psi per 100tion loss of 15 psi per 100tion loss of ' of 2½-inch fi re hose can be obtained. A study of Table of 2½-inch fi re hose can be obtained. A study of Table of2-1 further reveals that friction loss increases as fl ow increases.2 For example:
250 GPM are fl owing 250 GPM are fl owing 250 GPM are fl owing 250 GPM are fl owing Drop the last zero, leaving 25 Drop the last zero, leaving 25 Drop the last zero, leaving 25 Drop the last zero, leaving 25 Subtract 10, leaving 15 Subtract 10, leaving 15 Subtract 10, leaving 15 Subtract 10, leaving 15
Table 2-1 – Friction Loss Relative to Flow Rate in 2½ Hose"
GPM Flowing2½" Hose
Friction Lossper 100'
Hose
110 1 psi
120 2 psi
130 3 psi
140 4 psi
150 5 psi
160 6 psi
170 7 psi
180 8 psi
190 9 psi
200 10 psi
GPM Flowing2½" Hose
Friction Lossper 100'
Hose
210 11 psi
220 12 psi
230 13 psi
240 14 psi
250 15 psi
260 16 psi
270 17 psi
280 18 psi
290 19 psi
300 20 psi
17
Hydraulics
Rule-of-Thumb for 1½-inch Fire Hose: An application of the rule-of-thumb method is made to 1½-inch fi re hose. This section is designed to show that friction loss in 1½-inch fi re hose is equal to friction loss in 2½-inch fi re hose when four times as much water is fl owing through the 2½-inch fire hose. For example:
70 GPM are fl owingMultiply 70 x 4 = 280Drop the last zero, leaving 28Subtract 10, leaving 18
At 70 gpm, the result is 18 psi friction loss per 100 feet of 1½-inch fi re hose. (see table 2-2)3.
Table 2-2 – Relationship of GPM and Friction Loss in 1½" and 2½" Hose
GPM Flowing1½" Hose
GPM Flowing2½ Hose"
Friction Lossper 100' Hose
50 200 10 psi
55 220 12 psi
60 240 14 psi
65 260 16 psi
70 280 18 psi
75 300 20 psi
80 320 22 psi
85 340 24 psi
90 360 26 psi
95 380 28 psi
100 400 30 psi
105 420 32 psi
110 440 34 psi
115 460 36 psi
120 480 38 psi
125 500 40 psi
18
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Rule-of-Thumb for 1¾-inch fi re hose: Another modifi cation of the rule-of-thumb for 2½-inch fi re hose will apply to 1¾-inch fi re hose. Use the method described earlier for 1½-inch fi re hose, then divide the answer by two. For ex-ample:
150 GPM are fl owing 150 GPM are fl owing 150 GPM are fl owing 150 GPM are fl owing Multiply 150 x 4 = 600 Multiply 150 x 4 = 600 Multiply 150 x 4 = 600 Multiply 150 x 4 = 600 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Divide by 2, making 25 Divide by 2, making 25 Divide by 2, making 25 Divide by 2, making 25
At fl ow rate of 150 gpm, you have a friction loss of 25 psi per 100' in 1¾-inch fi re hose (see table 2-3)4.
Table 2-3 – Relationship of GPMand Friction Loss in 100' of 1¾" Hose
GPM Flowing1¾" Hose
Friction Lossper 100'
Hose
100 15 psi
105 16 psi
110 17 psi
115 18 psi
120 19 psi
125 20 psi
130 21 psi
135 22 psi
140 23 psi
145 24 psi
150 25 psi
GPM Flowing1¾" Hose
Friction Lossper 100'
Hose
155 26 psi
160 27 psi
165 28 psi
170 29 psi
175 30 psi
180 31 psi
185 32 psi
190 33 psi
195 34 psi
200 35 psi
19
Hydraulics
Rule-of-Thumb for 3-inch fi re hose: Another modifi cation of the gpm rule-of-thumb for 2½-inch fi re hose will apply to 3-inch fi re hose. Calculate the friction loss as though 2½-inch fi re hose was used, then divide that fi gure by two. For example:
600 GPM fl owing 600 GPM fl owing 600 GPM fl owing 600 GPM fl owing Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Drop the last zero, leaving 60 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Subtract 10, leaving 50 Divide by 2, leaving 25 Divide by 2, leaving 25 Divide by 2, leaving 25 Divide by 2, leaving 25
At a fl ow rate of 600 gpm you have a friction loss of 25 psi per l00' of 3-inch fi re hose (see table 2-4).5
Table 2-4 – Relationship of GPM and Friction Loss in 2½" and 3" Hose
GPMFlowing
Friction Loss per 100'2½" Hose"
Friction Loss per 100'3" Hose
120 2 psi 1 psi
200 10 psi 5 psi
300 20 psi 10 psi
400 30 psi 15 psi
500 40 psi 20 psi
600 50 psi 25 psi
Rule-of-Thumb Formula: The equation NP + FL + AP +/- EL = EP is used to determine rule-of-thumb calculations.
Where: NP = Nozzle Pressure FL = Friction Loss AP = Appliance EL = Elevation (add or subtract) EP = Engine Pressure
20
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Quick Reference Charts
As discussed earlier, the following quick reference charts are derived from actual fl ow measurements conducted by the PFA Hose and Nozzle Committee. These charts are limited to TFT automatic fog nozzles, 1-inch straight bore nozzles on 1¾-inch highrise hose, and 5-inch hose friction loss. These charts are carried on all PFA engines.
Quick Reference Chart 1: Engine pressure needed for 2½-inch hose with a Task Force Tip Fog Nozzle with varying gpm flow rates and hose lengths.ozzle with varying gpm flow rates and hose lengths.ozzle with var 6
Quick Reference Chart 1 – 2½" @ 150'-300' w/TFT Fog Nozzle
Length of 2½" Hose
150' 200' 250' 300'
GPM EnginePressure
EnginePressure
EnginePressure
EnginePressure
200 GPM 125 PSI 125 PSI 130 PSI 135 PSI
250 GPM 140 PSI 145 PSI 150 PSI 155 PSI
300 GPM 155 PSI 165 PSI 175 PSI 185 PSI
350 GPM 175 PSI 195 PSI 220 PSI 250 PSI
Quick Reference Chart 2: Engine pressure (low and standard) needed to attain various fl ow rates when using 1¾-inch preconnected and highrise hose with a Task Force Tip Fog nozzle.7
Quick Reference Chart 21¾" Preconnect & Highrise w/TFT Fog Nozzle
Engine PressureLow Pressure
GPM Engine PressureStandard Pressure
100 PSI 100 125 PSI
150 PSI 150 175 PSI
200 PSI 200 225 PSI
Note – Back pressure is dramatic on 200 gpm fl ow. Adequate personnel must be availabe to safely handle the hose at this fl ow.
21
Hydraulics
Quick Reference Chart 3: Engine pressure needed for 1-inch solid stream nozzle with 1¾-inch highrise hose.8
Quick Reference Chart 31" Highrise Solid Stream Nozzle w/1¾" Hose
1-Inch Highrise Solid Stream Nozzle
100 GPM — 75 PSI on fi re fl oor
150 GPM – 100 PSI on fi re fl oor
200 GPM – 150 PSI on fi re fl oor
Quick Reference Chart 4: Engine pressure needed for a Blitz Fire Nozzle at 500 gpm and varying lengths of 3-inch hose.9
Quick Reference Chart 4Blitz Fire/Max-Force Fog3-inch Hose at 500 GPM
Length Engine Pressure
100' – 200' 150 PSI
300' 175 PSI
400' 200 PSI
500' 225 PSI
Note – Maxium hose length is 500' of ' of '3-inch hose. Maximum inlet pressure at
the nozzle is 175 psi.
Quick Reference Chart 4: Friction loss in 5-inch hose at varying gpm fl ow rates.10
Quick Reference Chart 55-inch Hose Friction Loss
GPM Friction Loss Per 100'
0 – 500 0 psi
501 – 1000 5 psi
1001 – 1500 15 psi
1501 – 2000 25 psi
22
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
More Rules-Of-Thumb
2½-INCH FIRE HOSE FRICTION LOSS • TAKE GPM FLOW
• DROP THE LAST ZERO
• SUBTRACT TEN FROM REMAINING NUMBER
3-INCH FIRE HOSE FRICTION LOSS • TAKE GPM FLOW
• DROP THE LAST ZERO
• SUBTRACT TEN FROM REMAINING NUMBER
• DIVIDE BY TWO
1½-INCH FIRE HOSE FRICTION LOSS • MULTIPLY GPM BY FOUR
• DROP THE LAST ZERO
• SUBTRACT TEN FROM REMAINING NUMBER
1¾-INCH FIRE HOSE FRICTION LOSS • MULTIPLY GPM BY FOUR
• DROP THE LAST ZERO
• SUBTRACT TEN FROM REMAINING NUMBER
• DIVIDE BY TWO
PRESSURE LOSS FOR ELEVATION • DETERMINE VERTICAL DIFFERENCE IN FEET
• DIVIDE BY TWO
• THE ANSWER IS PRES- SURE IN PSI
• ADD IF PUMPING TO HIGHTER ELEVATION
• SUBTRACT IF PUMPING TO LOWER ELEVATION
• ESTIMATE TEN FEET PER STORY
23
Hydraulics
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
(2½", 3", OR 5" HOSE LINES)• PUMPS AT 150 PSI
• FLOWING 20 GPM PER HEAD, A 1500 GPM PUMPER CAN SUP- PLY APPROXIMATELY 75 HEADS
SIAMESE FIRE HOSE FRICTION LOSS • TWO HOSE LINES
DIVIDE FLOW BY TWO AND FIGURE FRICTION LOSS FOR ONE HOSE
LINE.• THREE HOSE LINES
DIVIDE FLOW BY THREE AND FIGURE FRICTION LOSS FOR ONE HOSE LINE.• ADDITIONAL HOSE LINES
DIVIDE FLOW BY NUM- BER OF HOSE LINES AND FIGURE FRICTION LOSS FOR ONE HOSE LINE.
STANDPIPE SYSTEMS • FIGURE PRESURE NEEDED FOR HANDLINE(S). IF MORE THAN ONE HANDLINE, USE LINE REQUIRING THE HIGHEST PRES- SURE FOR CALCULA- TION AND HAVE OTHER HANDLINE GATE BACK.• ADD 25 PSI FOR FRICTION LOSS IN SYSTEM PIPING.• ADD FRICTION LOSS FOR SUPPLY LINE(S) TO FIRE DPEARTMENT CONNECTION.
24
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
BUILDING EQUIPPED WITH FIRE PUMPS • CONNECT TO FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNEC- TION.
• DETERMINE IF FIRE PUMP IS OPERATING.
• IF FIRE PUMP IS OPERATING DETER- MINE IF PUMPER IS FLOWING WATER OR IF FIRE PUMP IS DOING
ALL THE WORK.
FOAM EDUCTORS
The PFA foam system is dynamic. Visit the PFA intranet for current foam types and application rates.
Visit Visit V http://www.tft.com for more information on foam eductors.
• DETERMINE NEEDED APPLICATION RATE
• 1% AT 100 PSI NP
MAXIMUM OF 300' 1¾" HOSE WITH 95 GPM JS-10 FOAM NOZZLE OR TFT AUTO MATIC FOG NOZZLE.
• 3% - 6% AT 100 PSI NP
MAXIMUM OF 200' 1¾" HOSE WITH 95 GPM JS-10 FOAM NOZZLE OR TFT AUTO- MATIC FOG NOZZLE.
BRESNAN CELLAR NOZZLE SIZE NUMBER OF HOLES
GPM AT
100 PSI
SPREAD AT
100 PSI
2½" 9 480 36 ft. dia.
1½" 6 100 20 ft. dia.
25
Hydraulics
TRUCK 1
Friction loss in Truck 1 waterway is 65 psi at 1000 GPM, and 115 psi at GPM, and 115 psi at GPM2000 GPM. These friction loss fi gures GPM. These friction loss fi gures GPMare inclusive of all piping and elbows from the tailboard to the nozzle.
Truck 1 carries 125' (two 50' sections and one 25' section) of 5-inch high pressure supply line that is tested to pressure supply line that is tested to pr300 psi. It also carries a 5-inch to 5-inch gated siamese so two engines can supply it. Consider a foward lay when supplying this truck for aerial operations.
Truck 1 is a 100' platform aerial.
• FOG NOZZLE
1000 GPM – PUMP AT 165 PSI TO THE TAILBOARD, PLUS ELEVATION
2000 GPM – PUMP AT 215 PSI TO THE TAILBOARD, PLUS ELEVATION.
• SOLID STREAM TIPS
DETERMINE GPM FLOWING FROM TIP SIZE AND FIGURE FRICTION LOSS FROM NOZZLE BACK. USE FIGURES IN LEFT COLUMN FOR WATER- WAY FRICTION LOSS.
• WHEN SUPPLYING WITH TWO ENGINES, DIVIDE FLOW BY TWO AND FIGURE FRICTION LOSS FOR ONE ENGINE.
TRUCK 2
Friction loss in Truck 2 waterway is 35 psi at 500 GPM, and 65 psi at GPM, and 65 psi at GPM1000 GPM. These friction loss fi gures GPM. These friction loss fi gures GPMare inclusive of all piping and elbows from the tailboard to the nozzle.
Truck 2 does Truck 2 does Truck not carry not carry not any high pressure supply line. It does carry a 5-inch to 5-inch clappered siamese.
Truck 2 is a 85' platform aerial.
• FOG NOZZLE
500 GPM – PUMP AT 135 PSI TO THE TAIL- BOARD, PLUS ELEVA- TION
1000 – PUMP AT
165 PSI TO THE TAIL- BOARD, PLUS ELEVA- TION
• SOLID STREAM TIPS
USE SAME CALCULA- TIONS AS TRUCK 1
26
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
TRUCK 5
Friction loss in Truck 5 waterway is 65 psi at 1250 GPM. These friction GPM. These friction GPMloss fi gures are inclusive of all piping and elbows from the tailboard to the nozzles.
Truck 5 Truck 5 Truck does 50' of 5-inch high pres-sure supply line that is tested to 300 psi. It does not carry anot carry anot 5-inch to 5-inch siamese.
Truck 5 is a 100' straight stick ladder
• FOG NOZZLE
1250 GPM – PUMP AT 185 PSI TO THE
TAILBOARD, PLUSE ELEVATION.
• SOLID STREAM TIPS
USE SAME CALCULA- TIONS AS TRUCK 1
ENGINE 5 (SNOZZLE)
Engine 5 is a 50' articulating boom snozzle.
• USE FLOW METER TO DETERMINE PROPER GPM
APPLIANCE FRICTION LOSS • 10 PSI
TURBO DRAFT
Visit Visit V http://www.turbodraft.net for http://www.turbodraft.net for http://www.turbodraft.netmore information.
• 200' 5-INCH HOSE WITH 20' LIFT – PUMP AT 190 PSI FOR 280 GPM
• 200' 5-INCH HOSE WITH 10' LIFT – PUMP AT 190 PSI FOR 480 GPM
• 100' 5-INCH HOSE WITH 20' LIFT – PUMP AT 180 PSI FOR 400 GPM
• 100' 5-INCH HOSE WITH 10' LIFT – PUMP AT 180 PSI FOR 570 GPM
27
Hydraulics
BLITZ-FIRE
Visit http://www.tft.com for more information.
• PUMP FOG NOZZLE FROM QUICK REFER- ENCE CHART WITH 3" HOSE
• MAXIMUM NOZZLE INLET PRESSURE IS 175 PSI AND MAXI- MUM GPM IS 500• WHEN USING STRAIGHT TIPS DONʼT EXCEED MAXIMUM PRESSURE OR GPM
RELAY PUMPING • IF GPM FLOWING IS KNOWN, FIGURE FRICTION LOSS IN SINGLE LINE OR SIA- MESE LINES AND ADD 20 PSI FOR RESIDUAL AT NEXT PUMPER
• WITH UNKNOWN GPM FLOWING WHEN RELAY PUMPING WITH A SINGLE 2½" HOSE, START AT 200 PSI, AND MAINTAIN 20 PSI RESIDUAL
• WITH UNKNOWN GPM FLOWING WHEN RELAY PUMPING WITH A SINGLE 3" HOSE, START AT 150 PSI, AND MAINTAIN 20 PSI RESIDUAL
• WITH UNKNOWN GPM FLOWING WHEN RELAY PUMPING WITH A 5" HOSE, START AT 130 PSI AND MAINTAIN 20 PSI RESIDUAL
28
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
RESIDUAL PRESSURE • MINIMUM RESIDUAL PRESSURE FOR ALL PUMPING OPERATION IS 20 PSI
DRAFTING • FOR EACH INCH OF VACUUM, WATER WILL RISE ONE FOOT IN THE INTAKE HOSE AND PUMP
ELECTRIC TRANSFER VALVE
See Waterous Manual or visit http://www.waterousco.com for more information.
• MAY BE SWITCHED AT PRESSURES BE- LOW 250 PSI. KEEP IN MIND THE EFFECT SWITCHING WILL HAVE ON HOSE LINES, PARTICULARLY WHEN SWITCHING FROM VOLUME TO PRESSURE
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
See Waterous Manual or visit www.waterousco.com for more information
• OPERATES BETWEEN 75 PSI AND 300 PSI
GOVERNORS
Visit Visit V http://www.class1.com for more information.
• RPM MODE
RPM IS INCREASED OR DECREASED VIA PRESET MODE OR IN 25 RPM INCRE- MENTS
• PRESSURE MODE
PUMP PRESSURE IS INCREASED OR DE- CREASED VIA PRESET MODE OR IN 4 PSI INCREMENTS
29
Hydraulics
Tender Shuttle Calculations
The following two factors are used to determine the number of tenders re-quired or the gpm that can be delivered at a tender shuttle incident:
1) Cycle Time 2) Total Tender Capacity Available (in gallons)
Cycle Time x Required Flow = Tenders Required
Total Tender Capacity Cycle Time
= Available GPM
• Cycle Time = Off Load Time+ Travel to Supply Time + Onload Time + Travel to Scene Time
ELECTRIC DISCHARGE VALVES • REQUIRED ON DIS- CHARGES 3-INCH" AND LARGER.
• CAN BE USED FOR SMALLER DISCHARGES
5-INCH INTAKE VALVES
Visit http://www.tft.com or http://www.harrinc.com for more information.
• NOT ON FRONT SUC- TIONS
• BUILT IN RELIEF VALVE SET FROM 100 TO 200 PSI
• RELIEF VALVE CAN BE ADJUSTED
30
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Drafting
Mechanics of Dratfi ngechanics of Dratfi ngechanics of Dr
The process of drafting is used as a primary water supply during three distinctly different applications; each with similarities and differences.
1) Pump Service tests: This is an annual test carried out to measure pump performance. This test requires 6-inch threaded draft tubes that attach directly to the pump. Any restriction of valves or couplings reduces the performance of the pump. While effi cient for pump tests, this process is not effi cient, nor utilized, for fi re ground operations.
2) D/O Training: Pumping at draft utilizing hypothetical problems may exceed the designed pump capacity, especially if rural water supply drafting equipment and techniques are employed. It is imperative that actual hydraulic fl ows are considered when fl owing hypothetical fi re problems to avoid cavitation problems.
3) Rural Water Supply: Pumping at draft from a porta-tank utilizing the low profi le strainer, the front suction, and/or a 5-inch valve may re- duce the draft capability of the engine by as much as 40%. Since most rural water supply operations can deliver a maximum of 500 gpm, the reduction of pump capacity is not a serious concern.
The pump system must be free of air leaks. Common sources of air leaks include discharge valves, drain valves, the 5-inch intake valve, the swivel joint on the front intake, and dry gaskets. To avoid these common problems, the following is recommended:
• Test the engine for leaks by attaching a section of capped suction hose to the pump and pulling a vacuum. The vacuum gauge should register a negative reading and hold it for at least one minute.
• If the truck does not hold a vacuum, identify the source of the leak and correct the problem. If unable to correct the problem, contact the PFA mechanic.
• It is best to wet any gaskets prior to hooking up the draft tubes. Dry gaskets tend to leak air.
• Flat pressure gaskets will not provide a consistent seal. Replace any pressure gaskets with draft gaskets.
• In most cases initiate draft in volume mode.
31
Hydraulics
• The chicksan pivot valve on the front intake should be greased at least once a year. This is accomplished by removing the threaded “Lock down” bolt and inserting the grease gun into the opening. Add grease until evident around the edge of the swivel.
• A faulty tank to pump valve that does not fully close will also contrib- ute to draft failures.
Equipment for Drafting
• 5-inch Storz couplings on 6-inch semi-transparent fl exible Kocheck draft tube is the PFA operations standard. “Draft gaskets” are required on all storz couplings used in the drafting process. A “draft gasket” may be differentiated from a “pressure gasket” by the elevated ridge on the outside edge of the gasket.
• A fl at strainer is the strainer of choice when drafting from a porta-tank. By using a fl at strainer over a barrel strainer, the water level in a porta- tank can be reduced to several inches, especially when a sump hole is incorporated under the porta-tank.
• The jet siphon feature of the fl at strainer is used to transfer water from one porta-tank into another when multiple porta-tanks are used. To ef- fectively transfer water between the two porta-tanks, use a second strainer and draft tube with a section of 1¾-inch hose pumped at 100 psi.
• Drafting without an operable intake valve should not be done on the fi reground. Engine tank water is not usable without the capability to shut off the draft tube.
Signs of Pump Cavitation
• Engine pressure will not increase but the RPMS will increase
• You hear a popping or cracking sound in the pump.
• The engine, pump and hose will start to jump, ultimately the Electron- ic Fire Commander (EFC) governor should shut down and go back to idle.
32
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Computing Maximum Lift
Lift is measured from the surface of the static source to the centerline of the pump. The height of possible lift is not affected by the angle of the intake hose. It is affected by the vacuum the pump can produce and by atmospheric pressure.
Theoretically, with a perfect vaccuum at sea level, a pump can lift water 33.8 feet (14.7 psi multiplied by 2.3 feet per pound). A perfect vacuum is impossible with a fi re pump and friction loss and atmospheric pressure need to be considered, so a maximum lift of 20 to 25 feet would be more likely.
The height that water can be lifted decreases with the altitude by about 1 foot for each 1,000 feet of elevation. The weather also affects drafting, but to a smaller degree.
To determine the height to which water can be drafted, the vacuum reading in inches of mercury at the compound gauge of the pumper is read and multiplied by 0.49. The result is then multiplied by 2.3 because water rises 2.3 feet for each psi removed.
The formula for determining lift is: H= 1. 13 Hg
where: H = height of lift (in feet) Hg = inches of vacuum
A good rule-of-thumb is that for each inch of indicated vacuum, water will rise one foot in the intake hose and pump.
PFA Foam System
The PFA foam system is dynamic and reevaluated often as new products are introduced.
Currently, PFA engines carry fi ve gallons of enviromentally friendly Micro-Blaze Out as their class “B” fi refi ghting solution.11
Engine 10 and Foam 10 are equiped for larger incidents. It is important to request assistance immediately when dealing with fl ammable liquid incidents larger than an Engine Company can handle.
Additionally, most PFA engines have a FoamPro delivery system for class “A” foam delivery.
33
Hydraulics
Calculating Class “B” Foam by Rule-of-Thumb
Class B foam usage requires that enough foam concentrate is on hand prior to fi re attack. An estimate of total foam usage can be done using the following formula:
Step 1) Estimate the surface area of the spill or fi re
• To estimate the surface area of a circular spill, fi rst estimate the diameter of the spill then fi gure as if a square (i.e. 20’ x 20’ spill = 400 sq ft).
Step 2) Multiply the surface area by 0.10 gpm/square foot to get application rate of foam solution.
Step 3) Estimate time of application.
• spill requires a 5 minute application rate • spill fi re requires a 10 minute application rate • tank fi re requires a 60 minutes application rate (any product over 6’’ deep is considered a tank fi re)
Step 4) Multiply required gpm by estimate of time to obtain total foam solution.
Step 5) Total foam solution multiplied by percentage of foam con- centrate show total foam concentrate required to be on scene prior to initiating fi re attack.
Class B fuels must be stationary for foam to remain on the surface. On areas where grade would allow foam to run off of fuel, foam solution must be continually reapplied. If the fi re is three dimensional, dry chemical extinguishers should be used to extinguish the fi re. Every attempt should be made to contain fuel in as small an area as possible.
34
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Example foam CalculaExample foam CalculaExample f tions
Gasoline Spill (20’ x 20’ diameter)
1) gasoline = non-polar
2) 20’ x 20’ = 400 square foot spill
3) 400 square foot x 0.10 gpm/square foot = 40 gpm foam solution
4) spill requires a 5 minute application rate
5) 40 gpm foam solution x 5 minutes = 200 gallons of total foam solution needed
6) 200 gallons of foam solution x 1% concentrate = 2 gallons of foam concentrate needed
Gasoline Spill – Fire (20’ x 20’)
1) gasoline = non-polar
2) 20’ x 20’ = 400 square foot spill – fi re
3) 400 square foot x 0.10 gpm/square foot = 40 gpm foam solution
4) spill requires a 10 minute application rate
5) 40 gpm foam solution x 10 minutes =400 gallons of total foam solution needed
6) 400 gallons of foam solution x 1% concentrate = 4 gallons of foam concentrate needed
Application rates for polar solvent spills and fi res are not included in this manual because of unresolved changes at press time. For the most up-to-date polar solvent application information contact your shift hazmat team.
35
Hydraulics
Relay Pumping Operations
An effective method for balancing fi re fl ow needs, distance, type of hose lay, and number of pumpers, is the “Maximum Distance Relay Method”
To determine the number of pumpers and the distance between them, the water supply offi cer needs to determine the following information: the distance between the water source and the attack engine, the gpm needs at the fi re, and the maximum distance that the gpm can be fl owed with the determined relay line. Relay line may be a 5", 3" or 2 ½". The 3" or 2 ½" may also be doubled (see table 2-5).12
Table 2-5 – Maximum Distance Relay Lengths in Feet
Flow in GPM
One 2½"Line
One 3"Line
One 4"Line
One 5"Line
Two 2½"
Lines
One 2½" &One 3"Line
Two 3"
Lines
250 1,440 3,600 13,200 33,000 5,760 9,600
500 360 900 3,300 8,250 1,440 2,400 3,600
750 160 400 1,450 3,670 640 1,050 1,600
1000 90 225 825 2,050 360 600 900
1250 50 140 525 1,320 200 375 500
Once the size of hose is selected and the needed gpm found, the chart determines the maximum length between pumpers. The distance from the source to the at-tack pumper is now divided by maximum hose length. That number, plus oneis the number of apparatus required to supply the fi re. This number includes the source pumper as well as the attack pumper.
During these pump operations, D/Os must maintain 20 psi residual over the required psi to support the next engine in the relay. The 20 psi is to prevent cavitation.
36
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Calculating Back Pressure
Friction loss is only one of the variables encountered in determining correct en-gine pressure. Whenever a nozzle is higher than the pump, back pressure exists and needs to be included in hydraulic calculations. Back pressure is the pressure exerted by a column of water as a result of gravity. It is independent of the twist-ing and turning of the hose or diameter of the line. Back pressure has a constant measurement of 0.434 psi per foot of height. If a nozzle is 100 feet above the pump, then the back pressure the pump has to overcome is 100 X 0.434 or 43.4 psi. Back pressure is added into the formula.
For ease of fi reground calculations, we can regard back pressure as 0.5 psi per ver-tical foot, or 5 psi per story in buildings. If the nozzle is lower than the pump, the back pressure becomes negative and is subtracted from the engine pressure.
To recap, NP + FL + BP = Engine Pressure.
Calculating Additional Water Available From A HydrantCalculating Additional Water Available From A HydrantCalculating Additional Water Available From A H
One of the most important operations in pumping at a hydrant is pressure drop as an indicator of hydrant capacity (see table 2-6).13
Table 2-6 – Additional Water Available from Hydrant
Percent Decrease of Pumper Intake
Pressure
Additional WaterAvailable
0 – 10 3 times amount being delivered11 – 15 2 times amount being delivered16 – 25 Same to amount being delivered
25 +More water might be available,
but not as much as is being delivered
A drop of about 0-10% from the static pressure to the residual pressure indicates that three equal parts equivalent to the amount being delivered is available to be supplied. A drop of ll-15% indicates that twice as much water as is currently being delivered is available. A drop of about 16-25% indicates that only one more equal part can be delivered from the system
Even after all lines are charged, the operator must watch the compound gauge closely to assure that immediate action can be taken if other pumpers operating nearby cause the residual pressure to decrease below the minimum operating level.
37
Hydraulics
Solid Stream Nozzles
Solid stream nozzles are carried on all PFA Engines. These nozzles are equipped with three different tip sizes (1", 11⁄1⁄1
8⁄8⁄ ", 1¼") for 2½-inch nozzles. When supplying
a 2½-inch nozzle with straight tips, supply the nozzle at 50 psi and use rule-of-thumb friction loss calculations.Each tip size represents a different gpm fl ow (see table 2-7).14
Table 2-7 – HandlineSolid StrSolid StrSol eamid Streamid Str Nozzle Tips
Tip Size GPM at 50 psi3⁄3⁄3
4⁄4⁄ " 1007⁄7⁄7
8⁄8⁄ " 150
1" 200
11⁄1⁄18⁄8⁄ " 250
1¼" 300
Master Streams
Currently, most PFA engines are equipped with Akron automatic fog nozzlesused as a deck gun for master streams. The fl ow range for most of these nozzles is between 500 gpm and 2000 gpm. While most fi re department hydraulic books state that master stream fog nozzles are pumped at 100 psi, the manufacturer rating for most Akron automatic nozzles is 80 psi. The D/O should know the brand nozzle that is equipped on his/her engine and the manufacturers operating requirements.
Some of the older reserve engines and truck companies are also equipped with straight tips. When supplying a master stream with straight tips, supply the nozzle at 80 psi and use rule-of-thumb friction loss calculations. As stated above, each tip size represents a different gpm fl ow (see table 2-8).15
Table 2-8 – Master StreamSolid Stream Nozzle Tips
Tip Size GPM at 80 psi
1¼" 400
13⁄3⁄38⁄8⁄ " 500
1½" 600
15⁄5⁄58⁄8⁄ " 700
1¾" 800
15⁄5⁄58⁄8⁄ " 900
2" 1000
38
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Danger Signals When Operating Pumps
When the pump is taking water from a hydrant and the compound gauge shows a drop in the residual pressure and eventually goes into a vacuum reading, it indicates that one of two things is happening. The pump may be demanding more water than the hydrant can supply, and the condition known as cavitation is beginning to occur, or the suction strainer is becoming clogged with scale or other foreign matter, which also leads to cavitation. In each case, the effect on the pump and the suction gauge is the same. The difference between the two situations lies in the causes. It is up to the pump operator to determine the cause at the fi rst warning from the suction gauge.
The fi rst situation (the pump demanding more water than the hydrant can supply) arises either when adding hose lines to the pump or when another pumper hooks up to another hydrant and robs water headed for the fi rst hydrant.
The second condition, when scale or other debris clogs a suction strainer, is more apt to develop gradually and is refl ected by a gradual drop in the residual pressure. Breaking down the suction line and cleaning the strainer is the only way to correct this condition.
Keep your eyes and ears open. Confi rmation of the fact that the pump is not get-ting enough water is indicated by the tachometer and by listening. As you try to increase the pump pressure by increasing the speed of the motor, the tachometer shows more revolutions per minute; however, the pressure gauge fails to show any higher pressure. During any pumping operation, you should dedicate at least one ear to the sound of the motor so you will be aware of the motor racing as you increase the throttle without obtaining the expected increase in pump pressure.
When drafting, the compound gauge needle will be on the vacuum arc informing you about the condition of the drafting operation. When the pump is primed, and during actual pumping, the vacuum reading will indicate the height of the lift (the vertical distance from the water surface to the center of the pump). One inch of mercury is equal to 1.13 feet of water column. For practical use, you can regard an inch of mercury equal to one foot of water column. Thus, if the lift is12 feet, the vacuum gauge should show a reading of about 12 inches of mercury. We say “about” because you can’t read the usual pump compound gauge to an accuracy of better than two or three inches of mercury.
Pump Gauges Can Tell You More Than Meets The Eye
Pump suction and pressure gauges can tell you more than what they are recording at any one moment. It is your job to interpret their full meaning. All gauges should be read head-on at eye level for accuracy. You can get two different readings by looking at a gauge from two different directions. Under fi reground operating
39
Hydraulics
Hydrants
The PFA hydrant system is composed of at least six different water districts. Hydrants are maintained by the district responsible for them. The water source for these hydrants is primarily a gravity system supplied from reservoirs. Some water districts also have electric pumps to assist with water delivery.
Hydrant mains that a D/O would use can be from 4-inches to 12-inches in diameter. They are a dynamic in nature. As main get older they fl ow less, old 4-inch mains are being replaced with larger mains, repairs are made to one part of the system that can increase fl ows to another, and fl ows can be affected by normal daily citizen usage.
The primary purpose of a water system is to supply water to the population. Modern water systems are built with a reserve capacity for large fi res. Hy-drants are part of the water system. Fire departments need to remember they are guests using the hydrant system. They do not own the water or the hydrant system.
PFA is fortunate. Most of the time when a D/O connects to a hydrant, it works well. Do not fall into complacency. Sometimes for various reasons the hy-drant a D/O is attempting to operate from will not work. This can be due to a multitude of reason such as rusted on caps, broken valves, frozen hydrants, or broken mains.
Due to possible hydrant failures, when the PFA D/O connects to a hydrant anticipate problems and have a back-up plan. Once the connection is made and water is fl owing, the D/O needs to consently evaluate the fl ow from the hydrant by monitoring the pump panel. Other engines can connect to the same water main and decrease fl ow, or a water main can break during pumping operations.
When these problems do happen, the D/O needs to notify command of a water supply defi ciency and begin actions to correct the situation.
conditions, reading a pump gauge to the nearest 5 psi is close enough for anything you need to calculate. The vacuum side of compound gauges is calibrated in inches of mercury, usually with markings at 10 inch intervals, with a maximum reading of 30 inches of mercury. The experienced pump operator frequently looks at the gauges when the pumper is in quarters to determine whether the needles are at zero; as the D/O starts to hook-up on the fi reground, he/she takes a glance at the gauges for the same reason. If the pressure gauge reads 5 psi when the pump is motionless and no water is entering it, then this error must be compensated for in later readings. Sometimes the compound gauge is off, and the needle may erroneously indicate a few pounds of pressure or inches of mercury. Again, this indicated error should be taken into consideration.
40
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Bresnan Distributor
While the Bresnan Distributor is used mostly in basement and cellar fi res, it also can be used advantageously in attic fi res.
The distributor might be classed as a large sprinkler head, particularly in its method of distributing water and the results obtained from it. The maximum range and direction may be considered to be about 36 feet in diameter for a 9-hole, 2½-inch nozzle. A 1½-inch nozzle has 6 holes and covers a circle about 20 feet in diameter. Due to the small range of the distributor nozzle, it is necessary to move this equipment quite frequently to minimize water damage.
The Bresnan Distributor is a rotating nozzle. The base end has a 1½-inch, or 2½-inch female connection with a gasket. The rotating portion of the appliance revolves on ball bearings and has 6 or 9 orifi ces. The 9 orifi ce has 3 openings which distribute water upward, 3 which distribute it straight out, and 3 which deliver water downward. The 6 orifi ce has 3 upward and 3 downward. The angle at which the orifi ces are set in the distributor gives it its rotating motion, and the centrifugal force of the 6 or 9 streams keeps the distributor in balance.
The distributor is connected to the male end of a 1¾-inch or 2½-inch hose and inserted through the fl oor, roof, or in a shaft. If the basement inlet pipes or pipe hole casings are available at the proper point, they may be used. If not, a hole ap-proximately 8 to 10 inches square should be cut as near over the fi re as possible. Since there is no shut-off on the Bresnan, it is necessary to use a hose clamp or a short section of hose with a gate valve to control the water. The clamp or gate should be conveniently located, but far enough back on the line that it will not interfere with the operation of the distributor. The clamp or gate valve should be in place before the distributor is attached, and the water should not be turned on until the distributor has been inserted into the hole. Shut off the water before the appliance is withdrawn. Extra hose needs be taken into the building so the nozzle location can be moved without waiting for additional hose to be brought to the fi re area. When the distributor has been inserted into the hole and the water is turned on, it is lowered to the fl oor below and pulled back about halfway if a hose clamp has been used. If a short section and a gate valve is used, lower the hose to where the gate is at the hole. It is important to center the distributor between the fl oor and ceiling. The distributor is then pumped by raising and lowering the nozzle 4 to 5 feet. This action will thoroughly distribute water to all areas. One hundred pounds of nozzle pressure needs to be maintained for effective action.
After use, carefully inspected the distributor to see that it has not been damaged, that all orifi ces are open, and that the gasket is in place and in good shape. It may be necessary from time to time to apply a few drops of oil to the bearings to keep the head operating freely. During operations, the water will act as a lubricant.
41
Hydraulics
Automatic Fog Nozzles
PFA uses Task Force Tip (TFT) Automatic Fog Nozzles. These nozzles are used with 1¾-inch, 2½-inch, and Blitz Fire operations.16
Most of these nozzles (2½-inch excluded) have two different pressure settings. These settings are “Standard Pressure” and “Low Pressure. In earlier versions of these automatic nozzles, the low pressure setting was designated as “Emer-gency Pressure”. These two terms are interchangable. The reason for these two different terms is because of NPFA 1964 Standard for Spary Nozzles (Shutoff and Tip). Older verisons of this standard would not allow the term “Low Pres-sure”. The manfacturers, wanting to use “Low Pressure”, lobbied the NPFA standard committee until wording was changed to allow for its use.
With automatic nozzles in the standard pressure mode, within a predetermined fl ow range, the gpm can vary while the nozzle pressure remains constant at 100 psi. It is important to understand that this automatic component of these nozzles is only true for the standard pressure mode. When operating in the low pressure mode, as the gpm increases or decreases, the nozzle pressure cor-responds accordingly. Because of this it is essental the D/O knows what mode the nozzle is set in prior to charging the line.
The TFT automatic nozzles also have a series of six indents on the bail. Each of these detents represents a gpm increase or decrease depending on if the bail is being opened further or closed down (see table 2-9).16
Table 2-9 – Performance at Detent Postions1¾-inch hose – 100 PSI nozzle pressure
Length of
HosePSI
6
GPM
5
GPM
4
GPM
3
GPM
2
GPM
1
GPM
200' 125 100 95 90 75 50 25
200' 150 130 125 115 85 55 45
200' 175 155 150 140 110 75 50
200' 200 180 170 160 125 80 50
Automatic nozzles, within a predetemined fl ow range, also adjust the stream quality. This means the effi cacy of gpm fl ow cannot be evauated visually. Stream charicteristic for an automatic nozzle fl owing 100 gpm will be visually similiar to an automatic nozzle fl owing 200 gpm. The D/O must know what the maximum desired gpm is and be careful to pump accordingly.
42
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Buildings Equipped with Fire Pumps
Current fi re codes require standpipes in buildings four-stories or higher. In the late 1980’s fi re codes were amended to increase minimum operating pressures on the top fl oor of buildings with standpipes from 65 psi to 100 psi. Because of this increased pressure requirement, many buildings four-stories and higher are equipped with stationary fi re pumps. Fire pumps can also be expected in some large horizontal commercial buildings that have special fi re protection requirements. Currently, there are approximately 35 buildings in the PFA dis-trict equipped with stationary fi re pumps.
Stationary fi re pumps are designed for a rated capacity and rated pressure. This rate is determined by fi re protection engineers and NFPA 20 Installation NFPA 20 Installation Nof Centrifugal Fire Pumps. The capacity rate and pressure rate determines the pressure the fi re pump will operate at.
Buildings with stationary fi re pumps are also required to have a test header. This test header resembles a fi re department connection (FDC) except for the male threads at the connection. It is intended as a discharge for annual station-ary pump testing. Valves are required for this test header. They will be located either externally on the building or internally. The size of the stationary fi re pump can be determined by multiplying the number of discharges at the test header by 250.
It is important to understand the difference between a FDC and a stationary fi re pump test header as one is for water intake and the other is for water dis-charge (see fi gures 1 to 3).
fi gure 3 – test header with internal valves
« fi gure 1 – test header with external valves
siamese FDC – figure 2 »
43
Hydraulics
Stationary fi re pump systems also have a clapper valve that separates the stationary fi re pumps from the fi re department connection (FDC). The pump operating at the highest pressure will control this clapper valve. During fi re-ground operations, if the stationary fi re pump is operating at a higher pressure than the PFA engine connected to the PFA engine connected to the PFA FDC, the water from the PFA engine will PFA engine will PFAnot fl ow. The result will be an overheated pump on the PFA engine.PFA engine.PFA
To determine which pump is in control of the clapper valve, the D/O can, cau-tiously, partially or completely close the discharge gate(s) of the pumper sup-plying the siamese. If pressure at the discharge gauge(s) drop, the pumper is supplying the water. If the pressure remain the same, the stationary fi re pump is supplying the water.
Fire Department Connections
Many buildings in the PFA district have FDCs. When the D/O is supplying a FDC the following points should be taken into consideration.
• Supply the system slowly. The older the system is, the more fragile it is.
• Some FDC caps are breakable and others are screw type.
• Don’t place your fi ngers into a FDC. They can contain foreign objects.
• If the FDC fails, place a siamese on one of the standpipe system discharg es and pump into the siamese to supply the system.
Finally, the following fi gures represent some different FDC confi gurations in the PFA district.
siamese FDC
triple FDC
5-inch FDC with fi re pump test header
quadruple FDC
44
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Fire Hydraulics Data
• Mercury is 13.546 times heavier than water.
• Atmospheric pressure at sea level is 14.7 psi.
• Practical considerations such as length of suction line, quantity of water involved, lift involved, atmospheric pressure, temperature of water and state of repair of pumper limit the actual maximum lift that is attainable in
the field.
• A perfect vacuum is impossible with a fi re pump and there will be friction loss, so the maximum lift at sea level would be approximately 20 to 25 feet.
• Vacuum pressure is considered negative pressure.
• Friction loss of unlined hose is approximately 2.2 times greater than for lined hose.
• Friction loss in zig-zag hose is approximately 6 % more than in a straight line.
• Friction loss in standpipes, regardless of diameter, is taken as 25 pounds.
• Deckgun friction loss is 10 pounds and this allows for loss due to elevation.
• Friction loss in deluge sets, siamese connections and gate connections is allowed for in the K-values of the engine pressure equation (EP= 1.1 + KL). Separate allowances should NOT be made when solving hydraulics problems.
• The key to the solution of many draft problems lies in the friction loss of the suction diameter used.
• A good solid stream fi re stream should not have a spread of more than 15- inches in diameter before it strikes its target.
• Deckpipes are considered to be 9 feet above street level.
• Pumps in fi re pumpers are approximately 3 feet above street level.
45
Hydraulics
• The discharge coeffi cient for open butts is 0.90. This is used to calculate the gpm for a given diameter hose without a nozzle.
• Optimum nozzle pressure on 11/8-inch and 1¼-inch handline nozzles is 50 psi.
• Optimum nozzle pressure on 1¼-inch to 2-inch solid stream masterstream nozzles is 80 psi.
• Optimum angle of nozzle for the attainment of maximum horizontal reach is theoretically 45 degrees. Under actual fi eld conditions which allow for theoretically 45 degrees. Under actual fi eld conditions which allow for theoretically 45 degrees. Under actual fi eld conditions which allow for weather, wind and other extraneous factors, the optimum angle is closer to 32 degrees.
• For nozzles at street level, the third story is generally the highest point of effective reach.
• For effective streams, the distance of nozzle from building should be equal to the distance above the street at the point of penetration.
• Deckpipes lose their effectiveness above the third fl oor.
• Unextended water towers are used to penetrate from the fourth to the seventh Unextended water towers are used to penetrate from the fourth to the seventh Unextended water towers are used to penetrate from the fourth to the seventh fl oors inclusive.
• Extended water towers are used to penetrate the seventh, eighth and ninth fl oors.
• Water towers should be 15 to 20 feet from buildings for work involving the fourth to seventh fl oors inclusive.
• Water towers should be a distance of 50 feet from building for work involv- ing the seventh, eighth and ninth fl oors or at opposite street curb if this
distance is not possible.
• The area of coverage of one sprinkler head is approximately 100 square feet.
• Practically speaking, the factors determining the range of a fi re stream are nozzle diameter, nozzle pressure, and nozzle angle.
46
Chapter Two
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 5.1 to 5.2.4 and 10.2
Notes
1 Michael Wieder et al. el Wieder et al. el Wieder et “IFSTA Pumping Apparatus Driver/Operator Handbook”, Fire Protection Publications, Oklahoma State
University, Stillwater, Oklahoma, 1999. p.114.
2 Kevin Wilson, “Driver/Operator Study Guide” (Kevin Wilson, “Driver/Operator Study Guide” (Kevin Wilson, “Driver study guide written for the Poudre Fire Authority, 1982) p. 24
3 Ibid, p. 24
4 Ibid, p. 24
5 Ibid, p. 24
6 Poudre Fire Authority Hose and Nozzle Committee, 1999. Quick Reference Charts.
7 Ibid, Quick Reference Charts.
8 Ibid, Quick Reference Charts.
9 Ibid, Quick Reference Charts.
10 Ibid, Quick Reference Charts.
11 For more information on MicroBlaze, see http://www.micro-blaze.com
12 Michael Wieder et al. el Wieder et al. el Wieder et “IFSTA Pumping Apparatus Driver/Operator Handbook”, Fire Protection Publications, Oklahoma State
University, Stillwater, Oklahoma, 1999. p. 317.
13 Ibid, p. 258
14 Kevin Wilson, “Driver/Operator Study Guide” (Kevin Wilson, “Driver/Operator Study Guide” (Kevin Wilson, “Driver study guide written for the Poudre Fire Authority, 1982) p. 27.
15 Ibid, p. 27
16 For more information on Task Force Tip, see http://www.tft.com
17 J. D. Wiseman and John E. Bertrand, “The Safe and Effective Use of Fog Nozzles: Research and Practice”, PennWell, 2003. p. 140.
47
Hydraulics
48
Chapter Three
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.2
Apparatus Inspection Policy
Apparatus Inspection Policy
POUDRE FIRE AUTHORITY
Operations Policy 1 - Apparatus Inspections
Scope: This policy explains the procedures for vehicle maintenance checks.
General
1. Poudre Fire Authority apparatus will be inspected using the daily or weekly checklists, whichever is applicable, on the appropriate Apparatus Inspection Record.
2. Daily inspections should be conducted in the morning and results recorded on the Apparatus Inspection Record at the time of the inspection.
Front-Line, Primary Vehicle Inspections Front-Line, Primary Vehicle Inspections
3. The following front-line, primary apparatus must be inspected every shift:
A. Engines B. Trucks C. Fire Inspection Coordinator vehicles
Front-Line, Secondary Vehicle Inspections Front-Line, Secondary Vehicle Inspections
4. These front-line, secondary vehicles require inspection the fi rst day of every crew’s set and anytime they were used the previous day:
A. Water tenders B. Brush units C. Hazardous materials squad D. Shift Battalion Chief vehicle
5. Daily inspections for front-line, secondary apparatus include starting the vehicle and checking fuel level, fl uid levels, emergency lights, headlights, turn signals and radio operation, and ensuring tires are not fl at.
50
Chapter Three
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.2Weekly Inspections Weekly Inspections
6. All apparatus will undergo the weekly checks every Saturday.
7. Reserve engines will be checked weekly by the engine company where the reserve apparatus is stationed. Reserve apparatus also will be checked at the time they are placed in service, by the crew that is going to use them.
8. Truck 2 will be checked weekly by Truck 1 or Truck 5 crew.
9. Air/Light 1 will be checked weekly by qualifi ed Breathing Apparatus Technicians.
10. All apparatus housed in volunteer stations will be checked weekly.
Monthly Inspections Monthly Inspections
11. Emergency response trailers will be checked the fi rst Saturday of every month by the personnel at the station where the trailer is assigned.
DATE ISSUED: May 23, 1984 DATE REVISED: February 1, 2000 DATE REVISED: August 17, 2001 DATE REVISED: December 21, 2004 DATE REVISED: June 24, 2005
John Mulligan, Chief
Apparatus Inspection Policy Continued:
http://sparky/policies/Operations-Policies/Ops04QuarterlyApparAudit.pdfPFA Operations Policy — Quar-terly Apparatus Audits
http://sparky/policies/Operations-Policies/Ops01ApparatusInspec.pdfPFA Operations Policy — Appara-tus Inspections
Note — PFA Note — PFA Policies and OD’s can only be Policies and OD’s can only be accessed from the internal PFA network
51
Apparatus Inspection Policy
Equipment Maintenance
Driver/Operators will be responsible for properly checking all fl uid levels, in-cluding, but not limited to, engine oils, power steering, automatic transmission, coolant, etc. D/Os will know the proper fl uids that are used. D/Os will know how to properly add fl uid to the level of the operating range. D/Os will be respon-sible for minor maintenance repairs including, but not limited to, replacing light bulbs; replacing wiper blades; tightening loose nuts, bolts, screws; etc. D/Os will be responsible for performing the daily, weekly and monthly checks, and will fi ll out service requests and describe mechanical problems.
Vehicle Fluids
Vehicle fl uids change as new vehicles arrive or new suppliers are used. Contact the PFA Mechanic to ensure proper fl uilds are being used for the vehicles the D/O is responsible for.
52
Chapter 4
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.3.1 to 4.3.3
Driver/Operator Rodeo Course
Rodeo Course
Driver Operator Rodeo Course Layout
54
Chapter 4
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.3.1 to 4.3.3
Driver Operator Rodeo Course Instructions
1. Starting west of the south lane of cones in front of the OEM and Training buildings, back through the straight-line exercise until the front bumper clears the last cone.
2. After backing through the straight-line exercise, drive forward through the exercise.
3. Proceed to the west side of the tower and drive forward through the offset alley. Engine may leave the concrete pavement when making the turn to set up for the exercise.
4. Drive past the barrels for the serpentine. Back through the serpentine passing the fi rst barrel on the driver’s side.
5. Drive forward through the serpentine passing the fi rst barrel on the passenger side.
6. Back into the alley dock on the east side of the cul-de-sac.
7. Position the engine and back into the parallel park exercise located on the west side of the cul-de-sac in front of the manufactured home.
8. Drive through the street passing to the north and then to the east of the tower and position for the diminishing clearance exercise. Contacting a curb while driving past the tower will invoke a point penalty as in hitting any curb in the exercise. Drive forward through the diminishing clearance exercise stopping with the front bumper at the fi nish line.
Time starts when the engine starts moving backwards for the straight-line exercise and stops when the air brake is set at the end of the diminishing air brake is set at the end of the diminishing air brake is setclearance exercise.
Passing time will be six minutes and 45 seconds. (6:45)
55
Rodeo Course
Rodeo Course Scoring & Rules
The rodeo course will consist of six parts:
1. Straight Line 2. 2. 2. Offset Alley 3. Serpentine 3. Serpentine 3. Serpentine 4. 4. 4. 4. Alley Dock 5. Parallel Parking 5. Parallel Parking 5. Parallel Parking 5. Parallel Parking 5. Parallel Parking
6. Diminishing Clearance & Stopping at a Line6. Diminishing Clearance & Stopping at a Line6. Diminishing Clearance & Stopping at a Line
Each part will be worth 50 points, for a total of 300 points overall. Each part Each part will be worth 50 points, for a total of 300 points overall. Each part must be completed prior to moving on. must be completed prior to moving on.
A backer may be used (only at the rear of the engine) any time the engine is in reverse. A spotter (one person) may be used front and rear for parallel parking. Having a backer is strictly the driver’s option. The driver is ultimately respon-sible.
The backer must remain outside the barricaded area in all events.
Failure will occur in the following three (3) situations:
1. Exceeding 10 mph on any part of the course. 2. Losing more than 50 points in any one part. 2. Losing more than 50 points in any one part. 2. Losing more than 50 points in any one part. 3. A total score of less than 70% (210 points). 3. A total score of less than 70% (210 points). 3. A total score of less than 70% (210 points).
If any portion of a cone or base is contacted, a 10-point penalty will be assesed. Cones will be reset after being hit if the apparatus will be passing that point again. Contacting a barrel is also a 10-point penalty.
Contacting a barricade will account for a 10-point loss if there is 3” or less move-ment. Measurement will be taken from the end that is moved the greatest distance. If movement is greater than 3 inches, points assessed will be as follows:
4” – 13 points 11” – 34 points5” – 16 points 12” – 37 points6” – 19 points 13” – 40 points7” – 22 points 14” – 43 points8” – 25 points 15” – 46 points9” – 28 points 16” – 49 points10” – 31 points 17”– failure
56
Chapter 4
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.3.1 to 4.3.3
Special Provisions
1. Parallel Parking— Having both right-side tires within 24” of curb constitutes being parked, as measured from the center constitutes being parked, as measured from the center widest portion of the tire. For this exercise, the tailboard can swing over cones or other object representing the curb. It is not satisfactory to park with a wheel or wheels on the curb. Distance will be measured from the wheel farthest from the curb.
2. Alley Dock
• stopping 18” or more from rear barricade ---------- 10 pts. • stopping 12” to 17” from rear barricade --------------6 pts. • stopping 6” to 11” from rear barricade ----------------3 pts. • You must be within 24” to have completed the exercise
3. Stop Line After Diminishing Clearance
• Crossing line ------------------------------------------------- 10 pts. • Stopping 18” or more before line ------------------------ 10 pts. • Stopping 12” to 17” short of line -------------------------- 6 pts. • Stopping 6” to 11” short of line ----------------------------3 pts.
4. Going over the allowed time will not constitute an automatic failure as before. Penalty points will be assessed at the rate of 1 point per sec - ond over the allowed time. Example: 12 seconds over the time will be as sessed a 12-point penalty.
• If measurement is greater than 24 inches the exercise is not considered complete.
> 12’’ to 24’’3 points off
0’’ to 12’’0 points off 3 points off0 points off
57
Rodeo Course
Straight Line
The straight line exercise is the fi rst on the rodeo course. The candidate will line up the apparatus as he/she chooses before the entry cones. The candidate will indicate to the evaluator that they are ready. After this point, the evalu-ator will start the time for the course when the candidate begins backward movement of the engine.
The straight line exercise measures a driver’s ability to travel continuously in a direction without weaving. The driver must steer the apparatus between two rows of cones that are spaced every 10 feet. The distance between the barriers shall be 6 inches wider than the width of the apparatus wheels. A minimum distance of 150 feet will be traveled. The candidate will fi rst drive the 150 feet backwards and clear the fi nal cone with the front bumper. The candidate will then reverse direction and travel the 150 feet forward. The candidate will be allowed the use of a backer during the reverse direction of travel if he/she chooses. Backers must stay outside the driving area. Cones that are hit during the forward travel will be repositioned for the reverse travel manuever. See rules sheet for penalty point assesment.
Solid line indicates forward direction of travel
Dashed line indicates reverse direction of travel
58
Chapter 4
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.3.1 to 4.3.3
Offset Alley
After the candidate completes the straight line exercise, he/she will proceed to the west side of the tower and drive forward through the offset alley. Engine may leave the concrete pavement when making the turn to set up for the exer-cise. Two alley gates have been set up at a distance of 10 feet wide; the distance between the gates is 34 feet. The driver will enter the fi rst gate and maneuver the apparatus in a forward direction through the second gate. No set speed has been established. The driver may stop and reposition if he/she chooses. The use of a backer will be allowed only when the engine is repositioning and in reverse. The backer must stay outside the driving area. See rules sheet for assesment of penalty points for striking the barricades.
Solid line indicates forward direction of travel
Dashed line indicates reverse direction of travel
59
Rodeo Course
Serpentine
As the candidate exits the offset alley he/she pro-ceeds down the left side of the serpentine exercise. This exercise measures the driver’s ability to steer the apparatus in close limits. The exercise will be conducted with the apparatus moving fi rst back-wards, then forward. Barrels have been placed 34 feet apart. Adequate space has been established on either side of the barrels. The driver is required to drive the apparatus in reverse between the barrels by passing to the right of barrel 1, to the left of barrel 2, to the right of barrel 3, position the ap-paratus and drive forward to the left of barrel 3, to the right of barrel 2, to the left of barrel 1 and exit the course around the building and prepare to enter the off set alley.
Solid line indicates forward direction of travel
Dashed line indicates reverse direction of travel
60
Chapter 4
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.3.1 to 4.3.3
Alley Dock
The alley dock exercise measures a driver’s ability to back the apparatus into the space provided. The dimensions are 10 feet wide by 30 feet deep. As the candidate exits the serpentine exercise in a reverse direction, he/she will back into the alley dock on the east side of the cul-de-sac and stop when they feel they are within 6 inches of the back barricade. When the driver stops, a measurement is taken and the appropriate penalty is given if necessary (see rules sheet). If the driver wishes, a backer will be allowed for this event. Backer must stay outside the driving area. The driver then proceeds forward exiting the alley dock and makes a sweeping left hand turn and prepares to enter the serpentine exercise.
Solid line indicates forward direction of travelSolid line indicates forward direction of travelSolid line indicates forward direction of travel
Dashed line indicates reverse direction of travelDashed line indicates reverse direction of travelDashed line indicates reverse direction of travel
61
Rodeo Course
Parallel Park
The parallel park exercise is done from the blind side, and the driver will be asked to position the apparatus in the space provided. The parking space dimensions are 8 feet deep and 34 feet long. The driver must have both tires within 24 inches of the back line to have qualifi ed for this event. Reasonable objects such as cones or a 4x4 will be used to represent a curb, and the bumper is allowed to swing over the objects. Tires may not contact the simulated curb, cones, or curb line. A 10 point penalty will be assessed for each occurrence. The barricades at each end represent buildings or cars. The bumpers cannot hit the barricades, or penalty points will be assessed. See rules sheet for penalty point assessment criteria. Stopping and repositioning of the apparatus will be allowed if the driver chooses.
A single backer or spotter will be allowed to assist the driver at the front or rear of the apparatus. The backer must stay outside the driving area. After completing the parallel park exercise, the driver will proceed to the diminishing clearance exercise.
62
Chapter 4
Reference: NFPA 1002 Standard for Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifi cations 2003 Edition.
Sec. 4.3.1 to 4.3.3
Diminishing Clearance
After completing the parallel park exercise, the candidate will position the ap-paratus for diminishing clearance. The entrance to this exercise measures 9’ 6” and the exit cones measure 8’ 2” apart. The candidate will maneuver the apparatus in a forward direction. After exiting through the last cones, proceed as close as possible to the fi nish line, without the front bumper passing the line. See rules sheet for assessment of penalty points for this exercise.
Solid line indicates forward direction of travel
Dashed line indicates reverse direction of travel
It is very important for the candidate to set It is very important for the candidate to set the air brake when they have stopped at the the air brake when they have stopped at the fi nish line. This signals the evaluator to stop fi nish line. This signals the evaluator to stop the watch for the candidate’s time.
63
Rodeo Course
64
Appendix
Appendix
The Poudre Fire AuthorityDriver/Operator
66
UNIT ID
COMMON NAME MODEL YEAR VEHICLEWEIGHT
PUMPGPM
TWO STAGE
H20 TANKSIZE (GAL)
FOAM TANKSIZE (GAL)
276 Engine 1 AM LAFRANCE 2001 37,600 1500 Yes 650 30
455 Truck 1 SIMON LTI 1997 73,500
550 Air/Light Truck CHEVROLET 1986 28,000
278 Engine 2 AM LAFRANCE 2001 36,400 1500 Yes 650 30
266 Engine 3 SIMON-DUPLEX 1994 37,850 1500 Yes 620 30
355 Tender 3 FORD 1986 35,000 500 No 1800 N/A
281 Engine 4 HME 2003 40,600 1500 Yes 650 30
760 Brush 4 Ford-550 XL 2002 14,100 125 No 300 30
275 Engine 5(Snozzle)
AM LAFRANCE 1999 44,500 1500 Yes 650 30
452 Truck 5 (Squad) SPARTAN 1991 35,300
279 Engine 6 AM LAFRANCE 2002 36,500 1500 Yes 650 30
354 Tender 6 FORD 1984 31,800 500 No 1800 N/A
251 Engine 24 SPARTAN 1984 34,300 1250 No 750 N/A
265 Engine 25 SPARTAN/General 1987 34,300 1250 Yes 750 N/A
258 Engine 26 SPARTAN 1991 37,100 1500 Yes 750 N/A
450 Truck 2 LTI 1982 57,300
270 Brush 7 FORD - SuperDuty 1997 12,600 125 No 300 8
274 Engine 7 HME 1998 42,800 1500 Yes 750 20 / 12
756 CSU Forestry Rig INTERNATIONAL 2003 29,060 300 No 900 N/A
277 Engine 8 FORD 2001 16,600 150 No 300 50
351 Tender 8 INTERNATIONAL 1983 46,000 300 No 3,550 Un-baffeled
269 Engine 9 HME 1996 33,100 1000 No 750 30
271 Brush 9 FORD - SuperDuty 1997 12,600 125 No 300 8
260 Foam 10 FORD-SuperDuty 1994 12,400 25 No None 300microblaze
272 Engine 10 AM LAFRANCE 1998 38,000 1500 Yes 650 30 / 20microblaze
453 Hazmat 10 (Squad)
INTERNATIONAL 1993 27,100
268 Brush 11 GMC 1995 10,120 125 No 300 8754 Engine 11 REO 1951 26,000 150 No 1000 8273 Engine 12 AM LAFRANCE 1998 38,100 1500 Yes 650 30-A / 10-B755 Tender 12 HME 2001 46,800 500 No 1800 30
(CAFS)282 Engine 14 SPARTAN/Gen-
eral2006 1500 Yes 650 30
761 Brush 14 FORD F-550 2002 14,100 125 No 300 50280 Engine 27 AM LAFRANCE 2002 36,500 1500 Yes 650 30257 Engine 13
(Squrt)SPARTAN 1989 46,000 1250 Yes 500 N/A
PFA Apparatus Specifi cs Spring 2006
Note – See PFA intranet for complete apparatus specifi cs67
Websites to Visit
Rules and Regulations, Policies, ODʼs PFA Intranet (can only be accessed from the internal PFA network)
Waterous Fire Pumps http://www.waterousco.com
Task Force Tips http://www.tft.com Blitz Fire portable monitors handline nozzles master stream nozzles foam eductors intake valves
Micro Blaze http://www.micro-blaze.com
Turbo Draft http://www.turbodraft.net
Jacobs Braking Systems http://www.jakebrake.com
3M Opticom http://www.3m.com
Harrington Intake Valves http://www.harrinc.com
Foam pro http://www.foampro.com
Governors http://www.class1.com
Command Lights http://www.commandlight.com
68
Copyright NFPA
NFPA 1002Standard on
Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifications
2003 Edition
Copyright © 2003, National Fire Protection Association, All Rights Reserved
This edition of NFPA 1002, Standard on Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator ProfessionalQualifications, was prepared by the Technical Committee on Fire Fighter ProfessionalQualifications, released by the Technical Correlating Committee on ProfessionalQualifications, and acted on by NFPA at its May Association Technical Meeting held May18–21, 2003, in Dallas, TX. It was issued by the Standards Council on July 18, 2003, with aneffective date of August 7, 2003, and supersedes all previous editions.
This edition of NFPA 1002 was approved as an American National Standard on July 18, 2003.
Origin and Development of NFPA 1002
In 1972, the Joint Council of National Fire Service Organizations (JCNFSO) created theNational Professional Qualifications Board (NPQB) for the fire service to facilitate thedevelopment of nationally applicable performance standards for uniformed fire servicepersonnel. On December 14, 1972, the board established four technical committees to developthose standards, using the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards-makingsystem. The initial committees addressed the following career areas: fire fighter, fire officer,fire service instructor, and fire inspector and investigator. The Technical Committee on FireFighter Professional Qualifications met regularly after the adoption of NFPA 1001 to producethe first edition of this document, which was adopted by the NFPA in 1976. NFPA 1002 wasthe second in the series of fire fighter professional qualifications standards.
Additional editions were adopted and issued by the NFPA under the auspices of the NPQB in1982 and 1988.
The original concept of the professional qualifications standards, as directed by the JCNFSOand the NPQB, was to develop an interrelated set of performance standards specifically for theuniformed fire service. The various levels of achievement in the standards were to build uponeach other within a strictly defined career ladder. In the late 1980s, revisions of the standards
69
Copyright NFPA
recognized that the documents should stand on their own merit in terms of job performancerequirements (JPRs) for a given field. Accordingly, the strict career ladder concept was revised,except for the progression from fire fighter to fire officer, in order to allow civilian entry intomany of the fields. These revisions facilitated the use of the documents by other than theuniformed fire services.
In 1990, responsibility for the appointment of professional qualifications committees and thedevelopment of the professional qualifications standards were assumed by the NFPA. TheProfessional Qualifications Correlating Committee, appointed by the NFPA Standards Councilin 1990, assumed responsibility for coordinating the requirements of all of the professionalqualifications documents.
The JPR format of this document is consistent with the other standards in the professionalqualifications project. Each JPR consists of the task to be performed; the tools, equipment, ormaterials that must be provided to successfully complete the task; evaluation parameters and/orperformance outcomes; and lists of requisite knowledge and skills one must have to be able toperform the task. The intent of the Technical Committee on Fire Fighter ProfessionalQualifications is to provide clear and concise job performance requirements that can be used todetermine that an individual, when measured to the standard, possesses the skills andknowledge to perform as a fire fighter.
In the 2003 edition of the document, the technical committee made changes to bring it intoconformance with the new NFPA Manual of Style and several small additions.
In Memoriam, September 11, 2001
We pay tribute to the 343 members of FDNY who gave their lives to save civilian victims onSeptember 11, 2001, at the World Trade Center. They are true American heroes in death, butthey were also American heroes in life. We will keep them in our memory and in our hearts.They are the embodiment of courage, bravery, and dedication. May they rest in peace.
Technical Correlating Committee on Professional Qualifications
Douglas P. Forsman, ChairUnion Colony Fire & Rescue Authority, CO [E]
Fred G. Allinson, Seattle, WA [L]Rep. National Volunteer Fire Council
Stephen P. Austin, State Farm Insurance Company, DE [I]Rep. International Association of Arson Investigators Inc.
Timothy L. Bradley, North Carolina Fire Commission, NC [E]Rep. TC on Fire Service Instructor Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
70
Copyright NFPA
Boyd F. Cole, SunnyCor Incorporated/SmartCoat Inc., CA [M]Rep. TC on Emergency Vehicle Mechanic Technicians Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Yves Desjardins, Ecole nationale des pompiers du Quebec, Canada [U]
David T. Endicott, Stevensville, MD [U]Rep. TC on Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Gerald C. Evans, Salt Lake City Fire Department, UT [L]Rep. TC on Public Safety Telecommunicator Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Kelly Fox, Washington State Council of Fire Fighters, WA [L]Rep. International Association of Fire Fighters
Jon C. Jones, Jon Jones & Associates, MA [SE]Rep. TC on Industrial Fire Brigades Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Alan E. Joos, Utah Fire and Rescue Academy, UT [E]Rep. International Fire Service Accreditation Congress
Charles E. Kirtley, City of Guymon, Oklahoma, Fire Department, OK [U]Rep. TC on Public Fire Educator Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Barbara L. Koffron, Phoenix Fire Department, AZ [U]Rep. TC on Fire Inspector Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Michael J. McGovern, Lakewood Fire Department, WA [U]
Gerard J. Naylis, U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission, NY [C]Rep. TC on Fire Investigator Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Chris Neal, Fire Protection Publications, OK [M]Rep. TC on Fire Officer Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
David K. Nelson, David K. Nelson Consultants, CA [SE]
71
Copyright NFPA
Rep. TC on Wildfire Suppression Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
William E. Peterson, Plano Fire Department, TX [M]Rep. International Fire Service Training Association
Hugh A. Pike, U.S. Air Force Fire Protection, FL [E]Rep. TC on Rescue Technician Professional Qualifications(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Richard Powell, Saginaw Township Fire Department, MI [L]Rep. TC on Accreditation and Certification(Vote Limited to Professional Qualifications System Management)
Johnny G. Wilson, Georgia Firefighter Standards and Training Council, GA [E]Rep. National Board on Fire Service Professional Qualification
Alternates
Jack R. Reed, Iowa Professional Fire Fighters, IA [L](Alt. to K. Fox)
Michael W. Robinson, Baltimore County Fire Department, MD [E](Alt. to J. G. Wilson)
Frank E. Florence, NFPA Staff Liaison
This list represents the membership at the time the Committee was balloted on the final text of thisedition. Since that time, changes in the membership may have occurred. A key to classifications isfound at the back of the document.
NOTE: Membership on a committee shall not in and of itself constitute an endorsement of theAssociation or any document developed by the committee on which the member serves.
Committee Scope: This Committee shall have primary responsibility for the management of theNFPA Professional Qualifications Project and documents related to professional qualifications forfire service, public safety, and related personnel.
Technical Committee on Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications
David T. Endicott, ChairStevensville, MD [U]
Steve Willis, SecretaryMFTE/SMTC, ME [SE]
72
Copyright NFPA
Rep. International Society of Fire Service Instructors
William Anderson, Carlsbad Fire Department, CA [L]
Salvator Camasi, Lil Lectric Incorporated, WA [E]
Jack Casner, The Great American Insurance Company, CT [I]
Yves Desjardins, Ecole nationale des pompiers du Quebec, Canada [U]
Collin J. DeWitt, Town of Gilbert Fire Department, AZ [U]
David R. Fischer, State Fire Marshal, NV [SE]
C. Gordon Henderson, City of Rome Fire Department, GA [E]Rep. Georgia State Firefighter’s Association, Inc.
Marcia S. Holtz, City of Madison Fire Department, WI [L]Rep. Women in the Fire Service
F. Patrick Marlatt, Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute, MD [SE]
Henry Morse, Fire Service Testing Company, Inc., FL [RT]
Hugh A. Pike, U.S. Air Force Fire Protection, FL [E]
Mickey Pophin, Texas Commission on Fire Protection, TX [E]
Thomas P. Ruane, Fire Service Training Consultant, AZ [SE]
Michael A. Wieder, Oklahoma State University, OK [M]Rep. Oklahoma State University Fire Programs
Michael L. Young, Volunteer Firemen’s Insurance Services, Inc., PA [I]Rep. Volunteer Firemen’s Insurance Services, Inc.
Alternates
Scott L. Davidson, Volunteer Firemen’s Insurance Services, Inc., PA [I](Alt. to M. L. Young)
Terese M. Floren, Women in the Fire Service, WI [L](Alt. to M. S. Holtz)
73
Copyright NFPA
Robert H. Noll, Yukon Fire Department, OK [M](Alt. to M. A. Wieder)
Ted J. Pagels, City of DePere, WI [SE](Alt. to S. Willis)
Robert Singletary, City of Warner Robins Fire Department, GA [E](Alt. to C. G. Henderson)
Frank E. Florence, NFPA Staff Liaison
This list represents the membership at the time the Committee was balloted on the final text of thisedition. Since that time, changes in the membership may have occurred. A key to classifications isfound at the back of the document.
NOTE: Membership on a committee shall not in and of itself constitute an endorsement of theAssociation or any document developed by the committee on which the member serves.
Committee Scope: This Committee shall have primary responsibility for documents onprofessional competence required of fire fighters.
NFPA 1002Standard on
Fire Apparatus Driver/Operator Professional Qualifications2003 Edition
IMPORTANT NOTE: This NFPA document is made available for use subject to importantnotices and legal disclaimers. These notices and disclaimers appear in all publicationscontaining this document and may be found under the heading “Important Notices andDisclaimers Concerning NFPA Documents.” They can also be obtained on request fromNFPA or viewed at www.nfpa.org/disclaimers.
NOTICE: An asterisk (*) following the number or letter designating a paragraph indicates thatexplanatory material on the paragraph can be found in Annex A.
Changes other than editorial are indicated by a vertical rule beside the paragraph, table, orfigure in which the change occurred. These rules are included as an aid to the user inidentifying changes from the previous edition. Where one or more complete paragraphs havebeen deleted, the deletion is indicated by a bullet (•) between the paragraphs that remain.
A reference in brackets [ ] following a section or paragraph indicates material that has beenextracted from another NFPA document. As an aid to the user, Annex C lists the complete titleand edition of the source documents for both mandatory and nonmandatory extracts. Editorialchanges to extracted material consist of revising references to an appropriate division in thisdocument or the inclusion of the document number with the division number when thereference is to the original document. Requests for interpretations or revisions of extracted text
74
Copyright NFPA
shall be sent to the technical committee responsible for the source document.
Information on referenced publications can be found in Chapter 2 and Annex C.
Chapter 1 Administration
1.1 Scope.
This standard shall identify the minimum job performance requirements for fire fighters whodrive and operate fire apparatus, in both emergency and nonemergency situations.
1.2* Purpose.
The purpose of this standard shall be to specify the minimum job performance requirements forservice as a fire department emergency vehicle driver, pump operator, aerial operator, tilleroperator, wildland apparatus operator, aircraft rescue and fire-fighting apparatus operator, andmobile water supply apparatus operator.
1.3 Exceeding Minimum Requirements.
It is not the intent of this standard to restrict any jurisdiction from exceeding these minimumrequirements.
1.4 General.
1.4.1 The fire department vehicle driver/operators shall be licensed to drive all vehicles theyare expected to operate.
1.4.2* The fire department driver/operator shall be subject to periodic medical evaluation, asrequired by NFPA 1500, Section 10.1, Medical Requirements, to determine that thedriver/operator is medically fit to perform the duties of a fire department vehicledriver/operator.
1.4.3* All driver/operators who drive fire apparatus shall meet the objectives of Chapter 4 foreach type of apparatus they will be expected to operate.
1.4.4 The fire apparatus driver who is required to operate an apparatus equipped with an attackor fire pump shall meet the requirements of Chapter 5.
1.4.5 The fire apparatus driver who is required to operate an apparatus equipped with an aerialdevice shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.
1.4.6 The fire apparatus driver who is required to function in the tiller position shall meet therequirements of Chapter 7.
1.4.7 The fire apparatus driver who is required to operate wildland fire apparatus shall meetthe requirements of Chapter 8.
75
Copyright NFPA
1.4.8 The fire apparatus driver who is required to operate aircraft rescue and fire-fightingapparatus shall meet the requirements of Chapter 9.
1.4.9 The mobile water supply apparatus driver shall meet the requirements of Chapter 10.
1.4.10* Job performance requirements defined by this standard shall be evaluated byindividuals approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.4.11 The job performance requirements need not be mastered in the order in which theyappear. The local, state/provincial, or federal training programs shall establish the instructionalpriority and the training program content to prepare individuals to meet the job performancerequirements of this standard.
1.4.12 The job performance requirements of Chapters 4 through 10 shall be performedutilizing vehicles of similar weight, wheelbase, and function as those expected to be operated inthe performance of the driver/operator’s normal duties.
1.4.13* Fire apparatus drivers who are expected to operate vehicles off-road shall meet therequirements of 8.1.2, in addition to the applicable requirements of Chapters 4 through 7.
Chapter 2 Referenced Publications
2.1 General.
The documents or portions thereof listed in this chapter are referenced within this standard andshall be considered part of the requirements of this document.
2.2 NFPA Publications.
National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA02269-9101.
NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 edition.
NFPA 13D, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One- and Two-FamilyDwellings and Manufactured Homes, 2002 edition.
NFPA 13E, Recommended Practice for Fire Department Operations in Properties Protectedby Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems, 2000 edition.
NFPA 13R, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up toand Including Four Stories in Height, 2002 edition.
NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 2003 edition.
NFPA 1001, Standard for Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 2002 edition.
NFPA 1003, Standard for Airport Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 2000 edition.
76
Copyright NFPA
NFPA 1500, Standard on Fire Department Occupational Safety and Health Program, 2002edition.
NFPA 1901, Standard for Automotive Fire Apparatus, 2003 edition.
2.3 Other Publications. (Reserved)
Chapter 3 Definitions
3.1* General.
The definitions contained in this chapter shall apply to the terms used in this standard. Whereterms are not included, common usage of the terms shall apply.
3.2 NFPA Official Definitions.
3.2.1* Approved. Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
3.2.2* Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). An organization, office, or individualresponsible for enforcing the requirements of a code or standard, or for approving equipment,materials, an installation, or a procedure.
3.2.3 Shall. Indicates a mandatory requirement.
3.2.4 Standard. A document, the main text of which contains only mandatory provisions usingthe word “shall” to indicate requirements and which is in a form generally suitable formandatory reference by another standard or code or for adoption into law. Nonmandatoryprovisions shall be located in an appendix or annex, footnote, or fine-print note and are not tobe considered a part of the requirements of a standard.
3.3 General Definitions.
3.3.1 Aerial Apparatus. A piece of fire apparatus with a permanently mounted,power-operated elevating device, including aerial ladders, aerial ladder platforms, telescopingaerial platforms, articulating aerial platforms, and elevating water delivery systems.
3.3.2 Aerial Device. An aerial ladder, elevating platform, aerial ladder platform, or water towerthat is designed to position personnel, handle materials, provide egress, and discharge water.
3.3.3 Aerial Operator. The fire apparatus driver who has met the requirements of Chapter 6for the operation of apparatus equipped with aerial devices.
3.3.4 Aircraft Rescue and Fire-Fighting (ARFF) Vehicle. A vehicle intended to carry rescueand fire-fighting equipment for rescuing occupants and combating fires in aircraft at, or in thevicinity of, an airport.
77
Copyright NFPA
3.3.5 Angle of Approach. The smallest angle made between the road surface and a line drawnfrom the front point of ground contact of the front tire to any projection of the apparatus infront of the front axle.
3.3.6 Angle of Departure. The smallest angle made between the road surface and the linedrawn from the rear point of ground contact of the rear tire to any projection of the apparatusbehind the rear axle.
3.3.7 Fire Apparatus. A fire department emergency vehicle used for rescue, fire suppression,or other specialized functions. [1710:3.3]
3.3.8 Fire Apparatus Driver. The fire fighter who has met the requirements defined inChapter 4.
3.3.9 Fire Department. An organization providing rescue, fire suppression, and relatedactivities, including any public, governmental, private, industrial, or military organizationengaging in this type of activity.
3.3.10 Fire Department Pumper. A piece of fire apparatus with a permanently mounted firepump that has a rated discharge capacity of 750 gpm (2850 L/min) or greater as defined inNFPA 1901.
3.3.11 Fire Department Vehicle. Any vehicle, including fire apparatus, operated by a firedepartment.
3.3.12 Fire Pump. A water pump with a rated capacity of 1000 L/min (250 gpm) or greater at1000 kPa (150 psi) net pump pressure that is mounted on a fire apparatus and used for firefighting. [1901:3.3]
3.3.13 Foam System. A system provided on fire apparatus for the delivery of a proportionedfoam and water mixture for use in fire extinguishment. The system includes a concentrate tank,a method for removing the concentrate from the tank, a foam-liquid proportioning system, anda method (e.g., hand lines or fixed turret nozzles) of delivering the proportioned foam to thefire.
3.3.14 Job Performance Requirement. A statement that describes a specific job task, lists theitems necessary to complete the task, and defines measurable or observable outcomes andevaluation areas for the specific task. [1000:3.3]
3.3.15 Liquid Surge. The force imposed upon a fire apparatus by the contents of a partiallyfilled water or foam concentrate tank when the vehicle is accelerated, decelerated, or turned.
3.3.16 Mobile Water Supply Apparatus (Tanker, Tender). A vehicle designed primarily fortransporting (pickup, transporting, and delivering) water to fire emergency scenes to be appliedby other vehicles or pumping equipment. [1901:3.3]
3.3.17 Off-Road Use. Use of fire department vehicles in areas where there is a need to traverse
78
Copyright NFPA
steep terrain or to cross natural hazards on or protruding from the ground.
3.3.18 Pump Operator. The fire apparatus driver/operator who has met the requirements ofChapter 5 for the operation of apparatus equipped with an attack or fire pump.
3.3.19 Pumping System. A pump, the piping, and associated devices mounted permanently ona piece of fire apparatus for the purpose of delivering a fire stream.
3.3.20 Requisite Knowledge. Fundamental knowledge one must have in order to perform aspecific task. [1031:3.3]
3.3.21 Requisite Skills. The essential skills one must have in order to perform a specific task.[1031:3.3]
3.3.22 Task. A specific job behavior or activity.
3.3.23 Tiller Aerial Apparatus. A tractor-trailer aerial apparatus with a steering wheelconnected to the rear axle for maneuvering the rear portion of the apparatus.
3.3.24 Tiller Operator. The fire apparatus driver/operator who has met the requirements ofChapter 7.
3.3.25* Wildland Fire Apparatus. Fire apparatus designed for fighting wildland fires that isequipped with a pump having a capacity normally between 38 L/min and 1900 L/min (10 gpmand 500 gpm), a water tank, limited hose and equipment, and that has pump and roll capability.[1906:3.3]
Chapter 4 General Requirements
4.1 General.
Prior to operating fire department vehicles, the fire apparatus driver/operator shall meet the jobperformance requirements defined in Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
4.2 Preventive Maintenance.
4.2.1* Perform routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions on the systems andcomponents specified in the following list, given a fire department vehicle and itsmanufacturer’s specifications, so that the operational status of the vehicle is verified:
(1) Battery(ies)
(2) Braking system
(3) Coolant system
(4) Electrical system
(5) Fuel
79
Copyright NFPA
(6) Hydraulic fluids
(7) Oil
(8) Tires
(9) Steering system
(10) Belts
(11) Tools, appliances, and equipment
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer specifications and requirements, policies, andprocedures of the jurisdiction.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use hand tools, recognize system problems, and correct anydeficiency noted according to policies and procedures.
4.2.2 Document the routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions, given maintenance andinspection forms, so that all items are checked for operation and deficiencies are reported.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Departmental requirements for documenting maintenanceperformed and the importance of keeping accurate records.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use tools and equipment and complete all relateddepartmental forms.
4.3 Driving/Operating.
4.3.1* Operate a fire department vehicle, given a vehicle and a predetermined route on a publicway that incorporates the maneuvers and features, specified in the following list, that thedriver/operator is expected to encounter during normal operations, so that the vehicle isoperated in compliance with all applicable state and local laws, departmental rules andregulations, and the requirements of NFPA 1500, Section 4.2:
(1) Four left turns and four right turns
(2) A straight section of urban business street or a two-lane rural road at least 1.6 km (1mile) in length
(3) One through-intersection and two intersections where a stop has to be made
(4) One railroad crossing
(5) One curve, either left or right
(6) A section of limited-access highway that includes a conventional ramp entrance andexit and a section of road long enough to allow two lane changes
(7) A downgrade steep enough and long enough to require down-shifting and braking
(8) An upgrade steep enough and long enough to require gear changing to maintain speed
80
Copyright NFPA
(9) One underpass or a low clearance or bridge
(A) Requisite Knowledge. The effects on vehicle control of liquid surge, braking reactiontime, and load factors; effects of high center of gravity on roll-over potential, general steeringreactions, speed, and centrifugal force; applicable laws and regulations; principles of skidavoidance, night driving, shifting, and gear patterns; negotiating intersections, railroadcrossings, and bridges; weight and height limitations for both roads and bridges; identificationand operation of automotive gauges; and operational limits.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate passenger restraint devices; maintain safe followingdistances; maintain control of the vehicle while accelerating, decelerating, and turning, givenroad, weather, and traffic conditions; operate under adverse environmental or driving surfaceconditions; and use automotive gauges and controls.
4.3.2* Back a vehicle from a roadway into restricted spaces on both the right and left sides ofthe vehicle, given a fire department vehicle, a spotter, and restricted spaces 3.7 m (12 ft) inwidth, requiring 90-degree right-hand and left-hand turns from the roadway, so that the vehicleis parked within the restricted areas without having to stop and pull forward and withoutstriking obstructions.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Vehicle dimensions, turning characteristics, spotter signaling, andprinciples of safe vehicle operation.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use mirrors and judge vehicle clearance.
4.3.3* Maneuver a vehicle around obstructions on a roadway while moving forward and inreverse, given a fire department vehicle, a spotter for backing, and a roadway with obstructions,so that the vehicle is maneuvered through the obstructions without stopping to change thedirection of travel and without striking the obstructions.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Vehicle dimensions, turning characteristics, the effects of liquidsurge, spotter signaling, and principles of safe vehicle operation.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use mirrors and judge vehicle clearance.
4.3.4* Turn a fire department vehicle 180 degrees within a confined space, given a firedepartment vehicle, a spotter for backing up, and an area in which the vehicle cannot perform aU-turn without stopping and backing up, so that the vehicle is turned 180 degrees withoutstriking obstructions within the given space.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Vehicle dimensions, turning characteristics, the effects of liquidsurge, spotter signaling, and principles of safe vehicle operation.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use mirrors and judge vehicle clearance.
4.3.5* Maneuver a fire department vehicle in areas with restricted horizontal and verticalclearances, given a fire department vehicle and a course that requires the operator to movethrough areas of restricted horizontal and vertical clearances, so that the operator accurately
81
Copyright NFPA
judges the ability of the vehicle to pass through the openings and so that no obstructions arestruck.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Vehicle dimensions, turning characteristics, the effects of liquidsurge, spotter signaling, and principles of safe vehicle operation.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use mirrors and judge vehicle clearance.
4.3.6* Operate a vehicle using defensive driving techniques under emergency conditions,given a fire department vehicle and emergency conditions, so that control of the vehicle ismaintained.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. The effects on vehicle control of liquid surge, braking reactiontime, and load factors; the effects of high center of gravity on roll-over potential, generalsteering reactions, speed, and centrifugal force; applicable laws and regulations; principles ofskid avoidance, night driving, shifting, and gear patterns; negotiation of intersections, railroadcrossings, and bridges; weight and height limitations for both roads and bridges; identificationand operation of automotive gauges; and operational limits.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate passenger restraint devices; maintain safe followingdistances; maintain control of the vehicle while accelerating, decelerating, and turning, givenroad, weather, and traffic conditions; operate under adverse environmental or driving surfaceconditions; and use automotive gauges and controls.
4.3.7* Operate all fixed systems and equipment on the vehicle not specifically addressedelsewhere in this standard, given systems and equipment, manufacturer’s specifications andinstructions, and departmental policies and procedures for the systems and equipment, so thateach system or piece of equipment is operated in accordance with the applicable instructionsand policies.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer's specifications and operating procedures, andpolicies and procedures of the jurisdiction.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to deploy, energize, and monitor the system or equipment andto recognize and correct system problems.
Chapter 5 Apparatus Equipped with Fire Pump
5.1* General.
The requirements of Fire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, and the job performancerequirements defined in Sections 5.1 and 5.2 shall be met prior to certification as a firedepartment driver/operator — pumper.
5.1.1 Perform the routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions specified in the followinglist in addition to those in 4.2.1, given a fire department pumper and its manufacturer’s
82
Copyright NFPA
specifications, so that the operational status of the pumper is verified:
(1) Water tank and other extinguishing agent levels (if applicable)
(2) Pumping systems
(3) Foam systems
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer's specifications and requirements, and policies andprocedures of the jurisdiction.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use hand tools, recognize system problems, and correct anydeficiency noted according to policies and procedures.
5.2 Operations.
5.2.1 Produce effective hand or master streams, given the sources specified in the followinglist, so that the pump is engaged, all pressure control and vehicle safety devices are set, therated flow of the nozzle is achieved and maintained, and the apparatus is continuouslymonitored for potential problems:
(1) Internal tank
(2)* Pressurized source
(3) Static source
(4) Transfer from internal tank to external source
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Hydraulic calculations for friction loss and flow using both writtenformulas and estimation methods, safe operation of the pump, problems related tosmall-diameter or dead-end mains, low-pressure and private water supply systems, hydrantcoding systems, and reliability of static sources.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to position a fire department pumper to operate at a firehydrant and at a static water source, power transfer from vehicle engine to pump, draft, operatepumper pressure control systems, operate the volume/pressure transfer valve (multistage pumpsonly), operate auxiliary cooling systems, make the transition between internal and externalwater sources, and assemble hose lines, nozzles, valves, and appliances.
5.2.2 Pump a supply line of 65 mm (2½ in.) or larger, given a relay pumping evolution thelength and size of the line and the desired flow and intake pressure, so that the correct pressureand flow are provided to the next pumper in the relay.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Hydraulic calculations for friction loss and flow using both writtenformulas and estimation methods, safe operation of the pump, problems related tosmall-diameter or dead-end mains, low-pressure and private water supply systems, hydrantcoding systems, and reliability of static sources.
83
Copyright NFPA
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to position a fire department pumper to operate at a firehydrant and at a static water source, power transfer from vehicle engine to pump, draft, operatepumper pressure control systems, operate the volume/pressure transfer valve (multistage pumpsonly), operate auxiliary cooling systems, make the transition between internal and externalwater sources, and assemble hose lines, nozzles, valves, and appliances.
5.2.3 Produce a foam fire stream, given foam-producing equipment, so that properlyproportioned foam is provided.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Proportioning rates and concentrations, equipment assemblyprocedures, foam system limitations, and manufacturer's specifications.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate foam proportioning equipment and connect foamstream equipment.
5.2.4 Supply water to fire sprinkler and standpipe systems, given specific system informationand a fire department pumper, so that water is supplied to the system at the correct volume andpressure.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Calculation of pump discharge pressure; hose layouts; location offire department connection; alternative supply procedures if fire department connection is notusable; operating principles of sprinkler systems as defined in NFPA 13, NFPA 13D, andNFPA 13R; fire department operations in sprinklered properties as defined in NFPA 13E; andoperating principles of standpipe systems as defined in NFPA 14.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to position a fire department pumper to operate at a firehydrant and at a static water source, power transfer from vehicle engine to pump, draft, operatepumper pressure control systems, operate the volume/pressure transfer valve (multistage pumpsonly), operate auxiliary cooling systems, make the transition between internal and externalwater sources, and assemble hose line, nozzles, valves, and appliances.
Chapter 6 Apparatus Equipped with an Aerial Device
6.1* General.
The requirements of Fire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, and the job performancerequirements defined in Sections 6.1 and 6.2 shall be met prior to certification as a firedepartment driver/operator — aerial.
6.1.1 Perform the routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions specified in the followinglist in addition to those specified in 4.2.1, given a fire department aerial apparatus, so that theoperational readiness of the aerial apparatus is verified:
(1) Cable systems (if applicable)
(2) Aerial device hydraulic systems
84
Copyright NFPA
(3) Slides and rollers
(4) Stabilizing systems
(5) Aerial device safety systems
(6) Breathing air systems
(7) Communication systems
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer's specifications and requirements, and policies andprocedures of the jurisdiction.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use hand tools, recognize system problems, and correct anydeficiency noted according to policies and procedures.
6.2 Operations.
6.2.1 Maneuver and position an aerial apparatus, given an aerial apparatus, an incidentlocation, a situation description, and an assignment, so that the apparatus is positioned forcorrect aerial device deployment.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Capabilities and limitations of aerial devices related to reach, tipload, angle of inclination, and angle from chassis axis; effects of topography, ground, andweather conditions on deployment; and use of the aerial device.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to determine a correct position for the apparatus, maneuverapparatus into that position, and avoid obstacles to operations.
6.2.2 Stabilize an aerial apparatus, given a positioned vehicle and the manufacturer’srecommendations, so that power can be transferred to the aerial device hydraulic system andthe device can be deployed.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Aerial apparatus hydraulic systems, manufacturer’s specificationsfor stabilization, stabilization requirements, and effects of topography and ground conditionson stabilization.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to transfer power from the vehicle’s engine to the hydraulicsystem and operate vehicle stabilization devices.
6.2.3 Maneuver and position the aerial device from each control station, given an incidentlocation, a situation description, and an assignment, so that the aerial device is positioned toaccomplish the assignment.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Aerial device hydraulic systems, hydraulic pressure relief systems,gauges and controls, cable systems, communications systems, electrical systems, emergencyoperating systems, locking systems, manual rotation and lowering systems, stabilizing systems,aerial device safety systems, system overrides and the hazards of using overrides, safeoperational limitations of the given aerial device, safety procedures specific to the device, and
85
Copyright NFPA
operations near electrical hazards and overhead obstructions.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to raise, rotate, extend, and position to a specified location, aswell as lock, unlock, retract, lower, and bed the aerial device.
6.2.4 Lower an aerial device using the emergency operating system, given an aerial device, sothat the aerial device is lowered to its bedded position.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Aerial device hydraulic systems, hydraulic pressure relief systems,gauges and controls, cable systems, communications systems, electrical systems, emergencyoperating systems, locking systems, manual rotation and lowering systems, stabilizing systems,aerial device safety systems, system overrides and the hazards of using overrides, safeoperational limitations of the given aerial device, safety procedures specific to the device, andoperations near electrical hazards and overhead obstructions.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to rotate and position to center, unlock, retract, lower, and bedthe aerial device using the emergency operating system.
6.2.5 Deploy and operate an elevated master stream, given an aerial device, a master streamdevice, and a desired flow so that the stream is effective and the aerial and master streamdevices are operated correctly.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Nozzle reaction, range of operation, and weight limitations.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to connect a water supply to a master stream device andcontrol an elevated nozzle manually or remotely.
Chapter 7 Apparatus Equipped with a Tiller
7.1* General.
The requirements of Fire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, and the job performancerequirements defined in Chapter 6 and Section 7.2 shall be met prior to certification as a firedepartment driver/operator — tiller.
7.2 Operations.
7.2.1* Perform the practical driving exercises specified in 4.3.2 through 4.3.5 from the tillerposition, given a qualified driver, a fire department aerial apparatus equipped with a tiller, anda spotter for backing up, so that each exercise is performed without striking the vehicle orobstructions.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Capabilities and limitations of tiller aerial devices related to reach,tip load, angle of inclination, and angle from chassis axis; effects of topography, ground, andweather conditions on safe deployment; and use of a tiller aerial device.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to determine a correct position for the tiller, maneuver the
86
Copyright NFPA
tiller into that position, and avoid obstacles to operations.
7.2.2 Operate a fire department aerial apparatus equipped with a tiller from the tiller positionover a predetermined route on a public way, using the maneuvers specified in 4.3.1, given aqualified driver, a fire department aerial apparatus equipped with a tiller, and a spotter forbacking up, so that the vehicle is operated in compliance with all applicable state and locallaws, departmental rules and regulations, and the requirements of NFPA 1500, Section 4.2.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Principles of tiller operation, methods of communication with thedriver, the effects on vehicle control of general steering reactions, night driving, negotiatingintersections, and manufacturer operation limitations.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate the communication system between the tilleroperator’s position and the driver’s compartment; operate passenger restraint devices; maintaincontrol of the tiller while accelerating, decelerating, and turning; operate the vehicle duringnonemergency conditions; and operate under adverse environmental or driving surfaceconditions.
7.2.3 Position a fire department aerial apparatus equipped with a tiller from the tiller position,given the apparatus operating instructions, an incident location, a situation description, and anassignment, so that the aerial device is positioned and stabilized to accomplish the assignment.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Principles of positioning and stabilizing the aerial apparatus fromthe tiller position.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to determine a correct position for the tiller, maneuver thetiller into that position, and avoid obstacles to operations.
Chapter 8 Wildland Fire Apparatus
8.1 General.
The job performance requirements defined in Sections 8.1 and 8.2 shall be met prior tocertification as a driver/operator — wildland fire apparatus.
8.1.1 Perform the routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions specified in the followinglist, in addition to those in 4.2.1, given a wildland fire apparatus and its manufacturer’sspecifications, so that the operational status is verified:
(1) Water tank and/or other extinguishing agent levels (if applicable)
(2) Pumping systems
(3) Foam systems
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer's specifications and requirements, and policies andprocedures of the jurisdiction.
87
Copyright NFPA
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use hand tools, recognize system problems, and correct anydeficiency noted according to policies and procedures.
8.1.2* Operate a wildland fire apparatus, given a predetermined route off of a public way thatincorporates the maneuvers and features specified in the following list that the driver/operatoris expected to encounter during normal operations, so that the vehicle is operated in compliancewith all applicable departmental rules and regulations, the requirements of NFPA 1500, Section6.2, and the design limitations of the vehicle:
(1) Loose or wet soil
(2) Steep grades (30 percent fore and aft)
(3) Limited sight distance
(4) Blind curve
(5) Vehicle clearance obstacles (height, width, undercarriage, angle of approach, angle ofdeparture)
(6) Limited space for turnaround
(7) Side slopes (20 percent side to side)
(A) Requisite Knowledge. The effects on vehicle control of braking reaction time and loadfactors; effects of high center of gravity on roll-over potential, general steering reactions,speed, and centrifugal force; applicable laws and regulations; principles of skid avoidance,night driving, shifting, and gear patterns; negotiating intersections, railroad crossings, andbridges; weight and height limitations for both roads and bridges; identification and operationof automotive gauges; and operational limits.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate passenger restraint devices; maintain safe followingdistances; maintain control of the vehicle while accelerating, decelerating, and turning, givenroad, weather, and traffic conditions; operate during nonemergency conditions; operate underadverse environmental or driving surface conditions; and use automotive gauges and controls.
8.2 Operations.
8.2.1 Produce effective fire streams, utilizing the sources specified in the following list, so thatthe pump is engaged, all pressure-control and vehicle safety devices are set, the rated flow ofthe nozzle is achieved, and the apparatus is continuously monitored for potential problems:
(1) Water tank
(2)* Pressurized source
(3) Static source
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Hydraulic calculations for friction loss and flow using both written
88
Copyright NFPA
formulas and estimation methods, safe operation of the pump, correct apparatus placement,personal safety considerations, problems related to small-diameter or dead-end mains andlow-pressure and private water supply systems, hydrant cooling systems, and reliability ofstatic sources.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to position a wildland fire apparatus to operate at a firehydrant and at a static water source, correctly place apparatus for fire attack, transfer powerfrom vehicle engine to pump, draft, operate pumper pressure control systems, operate thevolume/pressure transfer valve (multistage pumps only), operate auxiliary cooling systems,make the transition between internal and external water sources, and assemble hose lines,nozzles, valves, and appliances.
8.2.2 Pump a supply line, given a relay pumping evolution the length and size of the line andpumping flow and desired intake pressure, so that correct intake pressures and flow areprovided to the next pumper in the relay.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Hydraulic calculations for friction loss and flow using both writtenformulas and estimation methods, safe operation of the pump, problems related tosmall-diameter or dead-end main and low-pressure and private water supply systems, hydrantcooling systems, and reliability of static sources.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to position a wildland apparatus to operate at a fire hydrantand at a static water source, transfer power from vehicle engine to pump, draft, operate pumperpressure control systems, operate the volume/pressure transfer valve (multistage pumps only),operate auxiliary cooling systems, make the transition between internal and external watersources, and assemble hose lines, nozzles, valves, and appliances.
8.2.3 Produce a foam fire stream, given foam-producing equipment, so that the correctproportion of foam is provided.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Proportioning rates and concentrations, equipment assemblyprocedures, foam systems limitations, and manufacturer's specifications.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate foam proportioning equipment and connect foamstream equipment.
Chapter 9 Aircraft Rescue and Fire-Fighting Apparatus
9.1* General.
The requirements of Fire Fighter II as specified in NFPA 1001, the requirements of AirportFire Fighter as specified in NFPA 1003, and the job performance requirements defined inSections 9.1 and 9.2 shall be met prior to certification as a fire department driver/operator —aircraft rescue and fire-fighting (ARFF) apparatus.
9.1.1 Perform the routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions specified in the following
89
Copyright NFPA
list in addition to those in 4.2.1, given an ARFF vehicle and the manufacturer’s servicing,testing, and inspection criteria, so that the operational status of the vehicle is verified:
(1)* Agent dispensing systems
(2)* Secondary extinguishing systems
(3) Vehicle-mounted breathing air systems
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer's specifications and requirements, and policies andprocedures of the jurisdiction.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use hand tools, recognize system problems, and correct anydeficiency noted according to policies and procedures.
9.1.2 Operate an ARFF vehicle, given a predetermined route on an airport that includes themaneuvers listed in 4.3.1, and operation in all aircraft movement areas, so that the vehicle isoperated in compliance with all applicable federal, state/provincial, and local laws,departmental rules and regulations, and the requirements of NFPA 1500, Section 6.2.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. The effects on vehicle control of liquid surge, braking reactiontime, and load factors; effects of high center of gravity on roll-over potential, general steeringreactions, speed, and centrifugal force; applicable laws and regulations; principles of skidavoidance, night driving, shifting, and gear patterns; negotiating intersections, railroadcrossings, and bridges; weight and height limitations for both roads and bridges; identificationand operation of automotive gauges; operational limits; hazards of driving through smoke;control tower light signals; airfield markings; runway and taxiway designations; air and vehicletraffic patterns; and all aircraft movements areas.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate passenger restraint devices; maintain safe followingdistances; maintain control of the vehicle while accelerating, decelerating, and turning, givenroad, weather, and traffic conditions; operate under adverse environmental or driving surfaceconditions; and use automotive gauges and controls.
9.1.3* Operate an ARFF apparatus, given a predetermined route, off of an improved surfacethat incorporates the maneuvers and features specified in the following list that thedriver/operator is expected to encounter during normal operations, so that the vehicle isoperated in compliance with all applicable departmental rules and regulations, the requirementsof NFPA 1500, Section 6.2, and the design limitations of the vehicle:
(1) Loose or wet soil
(2) Steep grades (30 percent fore and aft)
(3) Limited sight distance
(4) Vehicle clearance obstacles (height, width, undercarriage)
90
Copyright NFPA
(5) Limited space for turnaround
(6) Side slopes (20 percent side to side)
(A) Requisite Knowledge. The effects on vehicle control of braking reaction time and loadfactors; effects of high center of gravity on roll-over potential, general steering reactions,speed, and centrifugal force; applicable laws and regulations; principles of skid avoidance,night driving, shifting, and gear patterns; negotiating intersections, railroad crossings, andbridges; weight and height limitations for both roads and bridges; identification and operationof automotive gauges; and operational limits.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to operate passenger restraint devices; maintain safe followingdistances; maintain control of the vehicle while accelerating, decelerating, and turning, givenroad, weather, and traffic conditions; operate during nonemergency conditions; operate underadverse environmental or driving surface conditions; and use automotive gauges and controls.
9.2 Operations.
9.2.1 Maneuver and position an ARFF vehicle, given an incident location and description thatinvolves the largest aircraft that routinely uses the airport, so that the vehicle is positioned forcorrect operation at each operational position for the aircraft.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Vehicle positioning for fire-fighting and rescue operations;capabilities and limitations of turret devices related to reach; and effects of topography, ground,and weather conditions on agent application, distribution rates, and density.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to determine a correct position for the apparatus, maneuverapparatus into that position, and avoid obstacles to operations.
9.2.2 Produce a fire stream while the vehicle is in both forward and reverse power modulation,given a discharge rate and intended target, so that the pump is engaged, the turrets aredeployed, the agent is delivered to the intended target at the correct rate, and the apparatus ismoved and continuously monitored for potential problems.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Principles of agent management and application, effects of terrainand wind on agent application, turret capabilities and limitations, tower light signals, airportmarkings, aircraft recognition, aircraft danger areas, theoretical critical fire area and practicalcritical fire area, aircraft entry and egress points, and correct apparatus placement.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to provide power to the pump, determine a correct position forthe apparatus, maneuver apparatus into that position, avoid obstacles to operations, apply agent,and determine the length of time an extinguishing agent will be available.
9.2.3 Produce a fire stream, given a rate of discharge and water supplied from the sourcesspecified in the following list, so that the pump is engaged, the turrets are deployed, the agent isdelivered to the intended target at the correct rate, and the apparatus is continuously monitoredfor potential problems:
91
Copyright NFPA
(1) The internal tank
(2)* Pressurized source
(3) Static source
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Principles of agent management and application, effects of terrainand wind on agent application, turret capabilities and limitations, tower light signals, airportmarkings, aircraft recognition, aircraft danger areas, theoretical critical fire area and practicalcritical fire area, aircraft entry and egress points, and correct apparatus placement.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to provide power to the pump, determine a correct position forthe apparatus, maneuver apparatus into that position, avoid obstacles to operations, apply agent,and determine the length of time an extinguishing agent will be available.
Chapter 10 Mobile Water Supply Apparatus
10.1* General.
The requirements of Fire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001 and the job performancerequirements defined in Sections 10.1 and 10.2 shall be met prior to certification as a firedepartment driver/operator — mobile water supply apparatus.
10.1.1 Perform routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions specified in the followinglist, in addition to those specified in 4.2.1, given a fire department mobile water supplyapparatus, so that the operational readiness of the mobile water supply apparatus is verified:
(1) Water tank and other extinguishing agent levels (if applicable)
(2) Pumping system (if applicable)
(3) Rapid dump system (if applicable)
(4) Foam system (if applicable)
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Manufacturer's specifications and requirements, and policies andprocedures of the jurisdiction.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to use hand tools, recognize system problems, and correct anydeficiency noted according to policies and procedures.
10.2 Operations.
10.2.1* Maneuver and position a mobile water supply apparatus at a water shuttle fill site,given a fill site location and one or more supply hose, so that the apparatus is correctlypositioned, supply hose are attached to the intake connections without having to stretchadditional hose, and no objects are struck at the fill site.
92
Copyright NFPA
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Local procedures for establishing a water shuttle fill site, methodfor marking the stopping position of the apparatus, and location of the water tank intakes on theapparatus.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to determine a correct position for the apparatus, maneuverapparatus into that position, and avoid obstacles to operations.
10.2.2* Maneuver and position a mobile water supply apparatus at a water shuttle dump site,given a dump site and a portable water tank, so that all of the water being discharged from theapparatus enters the portable tank and no objects are struck at the dump site.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Local procedures for operating a water shuttle dump site andlocation of the water tank discharges on the apparatus.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to determine a correct position for the apparatus, maneuverapparatus into that position, avoid obstacles to operations, and operate the fire pump or rapidwater dump system.
10.2.3* Establish a water shuttle dump site, given two or more portable water tanks, low-levelstrainers, water transfer equipment, fire hose, and a fire apparatus equipped with a fire pump,so that the tank being drafted from is kept full at all times, the tank being dumped into isemptied first, and the water is transferred efficiently from one tank to the next.
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Local procedures for establishing a water shuttle dump site andprinciples of water transfer between multiple portable water tanks.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to deploy portable water tanks, connect and operate watertransfer equipment, and connect a strainer and suction hose to the fire pump.
Annex A Explanatory Material
Annex A is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included forinformational purposes only. This annex contains explanatory material, numbered tocorrespond with the applicable text paragraphs.
A.1.2 The purpose of this standard is not to mandate that all fire apparatus driver/operatorsmeet the requirements of all chapters of this standard. Personnel should meet only thoseprovisions that pertain to the types of apparatus they will be expected to drive and operate.
A.1.4.2 Although the frequency of the medical evaluation is not specified, it is recommendedthat the medical evaluation be made on at least an annual basis.
A.1.4.3 It is the committee’s intent that this standard be applied to all fire department vehicles.Drivers of vehicles not specifically addressed in Chapters 5 through 10 (e.g., staff or commandvehicles, rescue or utility vehicles, and buses) are expected to meet the requirements of Chapter4. Agencies operating unique or special vehicles (e.g., tractors, bulldozers, cranes, and graders)
93
Copyright NFPA
should develop job performance requirements and training programs for those vehicles.
A.1.4.10 It is recommended that evaluators be individuals who were not directly involved asinstructors for the requirement being evaluated.
A.1.4.13 The maneuvers and features specified for this job performance requirement includedriving situations that the committee has determined to be essential. The committee recognizesthat each of these situations might not exist in all areas. Where this occurs, those specificrequirements can be omitted. It should not be assumed that all these vehicles are wheel drive.
A.3.1 Action verbs used in the job performance requirements in this document are based onthe first definition of the verb found in Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of theEnglish Language.
A.3.2.1 Approved. The National Fire Protection Association does not approve, inspect, orcertify any installations, procedures, equipment, or materials; nor does it approve or evaluatetesting laboratories. In determining the acceptability of installations, procedures, equipment, ormaterials, the authority having jurisdiction may base acceptance on compliance with NFPA orother appropriate standards. In the absence of such standards, said authority may requireevidence of proper installation, procedure, or use. The authority having jurisdiction may alsorefer to the listings or labeling practices of an organization that is concerned with productevaluations and is thus in a position to determine compliance with appropriate standards for thecurrent production of listed items.
A.3.2.2 Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The phrase “authority having jurisdiction,” orits acronym AHJ, is used in NFPA documents in a broad manner, since jurisdictions andapproval agencies vary, as do their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, theauthority having jurisdiction may be a federal, state, local, or other regional department orindividual such as a fire chief; fire marshal; chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department,or health department; building official; electrical inspector; or others having statutory authority.For insurance purposes, an insurance inspection department, rating bureau, or other insurancecompany representative may be the authority having jurisdiction. In many circumstances, theproperty owner or his or her designated agent assumes the role of the authority havingjurisdiction; at government installations, the commanding officer or departmental official maybe the authority having jurisdiction.
A.3.3.25 Wildland Fire Apparatus. These vehicles are expected to operate on a wide varietyof surfaces, including off-road. They are equipped with fixed or portable pumps used to supplyattack lines; however, these pumps are generally of a capacity that does not put the vehicle intothe classification of attack or fire pump.
A.4.2.1 Routine tests, inspections, and servicing functions should be performed on a daily,weekly, monthly, or other periodic basis as determined by departmental policy. Thespecifications provided by the manufacturer for these functions should be followed.
A.4.3.1 The maneuvers and features specified for this job performance requirement includedriving situations that the committee has determined to be essential. The committee recognizes
94
Copyright NFPA
that each of these situations might not exist in all areas. Where this occurs, those specificrequirements can be omitted.
A.4.3.2 The alley dock exercise can be used as practice for meeting or in the evaluation of thisrequirement. This exercise measures a driver’s ability to drive past a simulated dock or stall,back the apparatus into the space provided, and stop smoothly. A dock or stall can be simulatedby arranging barricades 12.2 m (40 ft) from a boundary line. These barricades should be 3.7 m(12 ft) apart, and the length should be approximately 6.1 m (20 ft). The driver should pass thebarricades with the dock on the left and then back the apparatus, using a left turn, into the stall.The exercise should then be repeated with the dock on the right side, using a right turn. [SeeFigure A.4.3.2(a).]
FIGURE A.4.3.2(a) Alley Dock Exercise.
The apparatus station parking maneuver can also be used as practice for meeting or in theevaluation of this requirement. This exercise measures the driver’s ability to back the apparatusinto a fire station to park or to back the apparatus down a street to reverse the direction oftravel. An engine bay can be simulated by allowing for a 6.1-m (20-ft) minimum setback froma street 9 m (30 ft) wide, with a set of barricades at the end of the setback, spaced 3.7 m (12 ft)apart to simulate the garage door. The setback from the street should be determined by thetesting agency to ensure that the distances reflect those encountered by the apparatus driverduring the normal course of duties. A marker placed on the ground should indicate to theoperator the proper position of the left front tire of the vehicle once stopped and parked. Astraight line can be provided to assist the operator while backing the apparatus, facilitating theuse of vehicle mirrors. The minimum depth distance is determined by the total length of thevehicle. [See Figure A.4.3.2(b).]
Note that for large vehicles, such as ARFF apparatus, this course might need to be modified.
95
Copyright NFPA
FIGURE A.4.3.2(b) Station Parking Procedure Drill.
A.4.3.3 The serpentine exercise can be used as practice for meeting or in the evaluation of thisrequirement. This exercise measures a driver’s ability to steer the apparatus in close limitswithout stopping. The exercise should be conducted with the apparatus moving first backward,then forward. The course or path of travel for this exercise can be established by placing aminimum of three markers, each spaced between 9 m (30 ft) and 12 m (38 ft) apart, in a line.The spacing of the markers should be based on the wheel base of the vehicle used. Adequatespace must be provided on each side of the markers for the apparatus to move freely. Thedriver should drive the apparatus along the left side of the markers in a straight line and stopjust beyond the last marker. The driver then should begin the exercise by backing the apparatusbetween the markers by passing to the left of marker No. 1, to the right of marker No. 2, and tothe left of marker No. 3. At this point, the driver should stop the vehicle and then drive itforward between the markers by passing to the right of marker No. 3, to the left of marker No.2, and to the right of marker No. 1. (See Figure A.4.3.3.)
Note that for large vehicles, such as ARFF apparatus, this course might need to be modified.
96
Copyright NFPA
FIGURE A.4.3.3 Serpentine Exercise.
A.4.3.4 The confined space turnaround can be used as practice for meeting or in the evaluationof this requirement. This exercise measures the driver’s ability to turn the vehicle around in aconfined space without striking obstacles. The turn is accomplished within an area 15.24 m ×30.5 m (50 ft × 100 ft). The driver moves into the area from a 3.7-m (12-ft) opening in thecenter of one of the 15.24-m (50-ft) legs, turns the vehicle 180 degrees, and returns through theopening. There is no limitation on the number of times the driver has to maneuver the vehicleto accomplish this exercise, but no portion of the vehicle should extend over the boundary linesof the space. (See Figure A.4.3.4.)
Note that for large vehicles, such as ARFF apparatus, this course might need to be modified.
FIGURE A.4.3.4 Confined Space Turnaround.
A.4.3.5 The diminishing clearance exercise can be used as practice for meeting or in theevaluation of this requirement. This exercise measures a driver’s ability to steer the apparatusin a straight line, to judge distances from wheel to object, and to stop at a finish line. The speed
97
Copyright NFPA
at which a driver should operate the apparatus is optional, but it should be great enough tonecessitate quick judgment. This exercise is to be performed both forward and in reverse with aspotter. The course for this exercise is created by arranging two rows of markers to form a lane22.9 m (75 ft) long. The lane varies in width from 2.9 m (9 ft 6 in.) to a diminishing clearanceof 2.5 m (8 ft 2 in.). The driver should maneuver the apparatus through this lane withouttouching the markers. The vehicle should be stopped at a finish line 15.24 m (50 ft) beyond thelast marker. No portion of the vehicle should protrude beyond this line. Vertical clearancejudgment should be evaluated using a prop with a crossbar that is adjustable, based on thevehicle height. During the evaluation, the driver should drive forward and back through theprop with the crossbar at several differing heights, including one that is lower than the top ofthe vehicle. The prop should not be struck. The intent of the vertical clearance judgment is forproper identification of the furthermost point in the form of the apparatus. In situations wherethe apparatus is gaining entry to roadways or limited-height areas, the driver/operator mustallow appropriate space ahead of the apparatus in order to avoid striking objects or to avoidextending apparatus into traffic lanes. (See Figure A.4.3.5.)
Note that for large vehicles, such as ARFF apparatus, this course might need to be modified.
FIGURE A.4.3.5 Diminishing Clearance Exercise.
A.4.3.6 Emergency driving simulation should be restricted to a driving track or similarcontrolled area. Emergency driver training should not be conducted on public ways. For moreinformation, see 49 CFR 383.
A.4.3.7 The committee’s intent for this job performance requirement is for the driver/operatorto be able to operate all major equipment and mechanical systems that are attached to theapparatus, other than those specifically covered in Chapters 5 through 10 of this standard.These types of equipment and systems include, but are not limited to, electric generationequipment, floodlighting systems, air compressors, air cascade systems, hydraulic rescue toolsystems, power reels for air or hydraulic hose, cranes and stabilizers, and A-frames or otherlifting equipment.
A.5.1 The requirements of Chapter 5 specify that the candidate shall meet the requirements ofFire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, before certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator. This means that the individual applying for certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator has met all of the objectives in Chapters 1, 4, and 5 of NFPA 1001. Theseobjectives include further requirements in areas such as fire hose, nozzles, and appliances; firestreams; water supplies; and sprinklers.
These requirements are in addition to the requirements of this standard. Any fire fighter who
98
Copyright NFPA
has already been certified as a Fire Fighter I should review the requirements of the referencedchapters of NFPA 1001, as the candidate can be tested on the requirements included therein.
A.5.2.1(2) Pressurized sources include the following:
(1) Connection to a hydrant
(2) Supply line from another pumping source
A.6.1 The requirements of Chapter 6 specify that the candidate shall meet the requirements ofFire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, before certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator. This means that the individual applying for certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator has met all of the objectives in Chapters 1, 4, and 5 of NFPA 1001. Theseobjectives include further requirements in areas such as fire hose, nozzles, and appliances; firestreams; water supplies; and sprinklers. These requirements are in addition to the requirementsof this standard. Any fire fighter who has already been certified as a Fire Fighter I shouldreview the requirements of the referenced chapters of NFPA 1001, as the candidate can betested on the requirements included therein.
A.7.1 The requirements of Chapter 7 specify that the candidate shall meet the requirements ofFire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, before certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator. This means that the individual applying for certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator has met all of the objectives in Chapters 1, 4, and 5 of NFPA 1001. Theseobjectives include further requirements in areas such as fire hose, nozzles, and appliances; firestreams; water supplies; and sprinklers. These requirements are in addition to therequirements of this standard. Any fire fighter who has already been certified as a Fire Fighter Ishould review the requirements of the referenced chapters of NFPA 1001, as the candidate canbe tested on the requirements included therein.
A.7.2.1 See A.4.3.3 through A.4.3.5.
A.8.1.2 The maneuvers and features specified for this job performance requirement includedriving situations that the committee has determined to be essential. The committee recognizesthat each of these situations might not exist in all areas. Where this occurs, those specificrequirements can be omitted.
A.8.2.1(2) Pressurized sources include the following:
(1) Connection to a hydrant
(2) Supply line from another pumping source
A.9.1 The requirements of Chapter 9 specify that the candidate shall meet the requirements ofFire Fighter II as specified in NFPA 1001, before certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator. This means that the individual applying for certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator has met all of the objectives in Chapters 1, 4, and 5 of NFPA 1001. Theseobjectives include further requirements in areas such as fire hose, nozzles, and appliances; firestreams; water supplies; and sprinklers. These requirements are in addition to the
99
Copyright NFPA
requirements of this standard. Any fire fighter who has already been certified as a Fire FighterII should review the requirements of the referenced chapters of NFPA 1001, as the candidatecan be tested on the requirements included therein.
A.9.1.1(1) An agent dispensing system is the primary fire suppression agent carried on ARFFvehicles and usually is aqueous film-forming foam (AFFF).
A.9.1.1(2) A secondary extinguishing system is a separate system, totally independent of theprimary system. It includes Halon 1211 (its future replacement), dry chemical, and other suchsystems used for specific types of aircraft-associated fires.
A.9.1.3 The maneuvers and features specified for this job performance requirement includedriving situations that the committee has determined to be essential. The committee recognizesthat each of these situations might not exist in all areas. Where this occurs, those specificrequirements can be omitted.
A.9.2.3(2) Pressurized sources include the following:
(1) Connection to a hydrant
(2) Supply line from another pumping source
A.10.1 The requirements of Chapter 10 specify that the candidate shall meet the requirementsof Fire Fighter I as specified in NFPA 1001, before certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator. This means that the individual applying for certification as a fire apparatusdriver/operator has met all of the objectives in Chapters 1, 4, and 5 of NFPA 1001. Theseobjectives include further requirements in areas such as fire hose, nozzles, and appliances; firestreams; water supplies; and sprinklers. These requirements are in addition to the requirementsof this standard. Any fire fighter who has already been certified as a Fire Fighter I shouldreview the requirements of the referenced chapters of NFPA 1001, as the candidate can betested on the requirements included therein.
A.10.2.1 The intent of this requirement is for the driver/operator to be able to quickly andefficiently position the vehicle at a water shuttle fill site that has been established prior to thevehicle’s arrival. Most commonly a fire department pumper will connect to a water supplysource and lay hose out that can be quickly attached to the mobile water supply apparatus onceit arrives at the fill site. If the jurisdiction operates its fill site operations in a different manner,this requirement might need to be adjusted accordingly.
A.10.2.2 The intent of this requirement is for the driver/operator to be able to quickly andefficiently position the vehicle at a water shuttle dump site that has been established prior to thevehicle’s arrival. The dump site will typically consist of one or more portable tanks that havebeen deployed on the ground. A fire department pumper drafts water from the portable tanksfor use on the incident. The mobile water supply apparatus’ function is to quickly dump theirload into the portable tank and return to the fill site for another load. Depending on the designof the mobile water supply apparatus, one of three methods can be used to discharge water intothe portable water tank. These methods include pumping the water off, using a gravity dump,
100
Copyright NFPA
or using a jet-assisted gravity dump. Depending on the design of the apparatus, water can bedischarged from the front, rear, or either side of the vehicle.
A.10.2.3 A proper dump site involves the use of two or more portable tanks that are connectedby a series of water transfer equipment. The water transfer equipment can be supplied byhoselines from the pumper that is supplying the fire scene or a second pumper placed at thedrafting tank for the sole purpose of transferring water between the tanks. The goal is to keepthe tank from which water is being drafted full at all times and the tank from which water isbeing dumped empty. This will ensure that mobile water supply apparatus that arrive at thedump site can unload their water and return for more in the shortest time possible.
Annex B Job Performance Requirements
This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included forinformational purposes only.
B.1 Explanation of the Standard and Concepts of Job Performance Requirements (JPRs).
The primary benefit of establishing national professional qualification standards is to provideboth public and private sectors with a framework of the job requirements for the fire service.Other benefits include enhancement of the profession, individual as well as organizationalgrowth and development, and standardization of practices.
NFPA professional qualification standards identify the minimum JPRs for specific fire servicepositions. The standards can be used for training design and evaluation, certification,measuring and critiquing on-the-job performance, defining hiring practices, and settingorganizational policies, procedures, and goals. (Other applications are encouraged.)
Professional qualification standards for a specific job are organized by major areas ofresponsibility defined as duties. For example, the fire fighter’s duties might include firesuppression, rescue, and water supply; the public fire educator’s duties might includeeducation, planning and development, and administration. Duties are major functional areas ofresponsibility within a job.
The professional qualifications standards are written as JPRs. JPRs describe the performancerequired for a specific job. JPRs are grouped according to the duties of a job. The complete listof JPRs for each duty defines what an individual must be able to do in order to successfullyperform that duty. Together, the duties and their JPRs define the job parameters; that is, thestandard as a whole is a job description.
B.2 Breaking Down the Components of a JPR.
The JPR is the assembly of three critical components. (See Table B.2.) These components areas follows:
(1) Task that is to be performed
101
Copyright NFPA
(2) Tools, equipment, or materials that must be provided to successfully complete the task
(3) Evaluation parameters and/or performance outcomes
Table B.2 Example of a JPR
(1) Task (1) Establish a water shuttledump site
(2) Tools, equipment, ormaterials
(2) Given two or moreportable water tanks,low-level strainers, watertransfer equipment, fire hose,and a fire apparatus equippedwith a water pump
(3) Evaluation parametersand performance outcomes
(3) So that the tank beingdrafted from is kept full at alltimes, the tank being dumpedinto is emptied first, andwater is transferred efficientlyfrom one tank to the next
B.2.1 The Task to be Performed. The first component is a concise, brief statement of whatthe person is supposed to do.
B.2.2 Tools, Equipment, or Materials that Must be Provided to Successfully Complete theTask. This component ensures that all individuals completing the task are given the sameminimal tools, equipment, or materials when being evaluated. By listing these items, theperformer and evaluator know what must be provided in order to complete the task.
B.2.3 Evaluation Parameters and/or Performance Outcomes. This component defines howwell one must perform each task — for both the performer and the evaluator. The JPR guidesperformance toward successful completion by identifying evaluation parameters and/orperformance outcomes. This portion of the JPR promotes consistency in evaluation by reducingthe variables used to gauge performance.
In addition to these three components, the JPR contains requisite knowledge and skills. Just asthe term requisite suggests, these are the necessary knowledge and skills one must have to beable to perform the task. Requisite knowledge and skills are the foundation for taskperformance.
Once the components and requisites are put together, the JPR might read as follows.
B.2.3.1 Example: Establish a water shuttle dump site, given two or more portable water tanks,low-level strainers, water transfer equipment, fire hose, and a fire apparatus equipped with afire pump, so that the tank being drafted from is kept full at all times, the tank being dumpedinto is emptied first, and water is transferred efficiently from one tank to the next.
102
Copyright NFPA
(A) Requisite Knowledge. Local procedures for establishing a water shuttle dump site andprinciples of water transfer between multiple portable water tanks.
(B) Requisite Skills. The ability to deploy portable water tanks, connect and operate watertransfer equipment, and connect a strainer and suction hose to the fire pump.
B.3 Examples of Potential Uses.
B.3.1 Certification. JPRs can be used to establish the evaluation criteria for certification at aspecific job level. When used for certification, evaluation must be based on the successfulcompletion of JPRs.
First, the evaluator would verify the attainment of requisite knowledge and skills prior to JPRevaluation. This might be through documentation review or testing.
Next, the candidate would be evaluated on completing the JPRs. The candidate would performthe task and be evaluated based on the evaluation parameters and/or performance outcomes.This performance-based evaluation can be either practical (for psychomotor skills such as“ventilate a roof”) or written (for cognitive skills such as “interpret burn patterns”).
Note that psychomotor skills are those physical skills that can be demonstrated or observed.Cognitive skills (or mental skills) cannot be observed but are evaluated on how one completesthe task (process-oriented) or on the task outcome (product-oriented).
Using the previous example, a practical performance-based evaluation would measure theability to “establish a water shuttle dump site.” The candidate passes this particular evaluationif the standard was met — that is, the tank being drafted from is kept full at all times, the tankbeing dumped into is emptied first, and water is transferred efficiently from one tank toanother.
It is important to remember that when a candidate is being evaluated, he or she must be giventhe tools, equipment, or materials listed in the JPRs (e.g., a portable tank, a low-level strainer,fire hose, and a fire apparatus equipped with a water pump) before he or she can be properlyevaluated.
B.3.2 Curriculum Development/Training Design and Evaluation. The statements containedin this document that refer to job performance were designed and written as JPRs. While aresemblance to instructional objectives might be present, these statements should not be used ina teaching situation until after they have been modified for instructional use.
JPRs state the behaviors required to perform specific skill(s) on the job as opposed to a learningsituation. These statements should be converted into instructional objectives with behaviors,conditions, and standards that can be measured within the teaching/learning environment. AJPR that requires a driver/operator to “establish a water shuttle dump site” should be convertedinto a measurable instructional objective for use when teaching the skill. [See Figure B.3.2(a).]
103
Copyright NFPA
FIGURE B.3.2(a) Converting JPRs into Instructional Objectives.
In the previous example, the JPR requiring a driver/operator to establish a water shuttle dumpsite should be converted into a measurable instructional objective for use when teaching thetask. Using the example, a terminal instructional objective might read as follows.
The candidate will establish a water shuttle dump site, given two or more portable water tanks,
104
Copyright NFPA
low-level strainers, water transfer equipment, fire hose, and a fire apparatus equipped with afire pump, so that 100 percent accuracy is attained on a skills checklist. (At a minimum, theskills checklist should include each of the measurement criteria from the JPR.)
Figure B.3.2(b) is a sample checklist for use in evaluating this objective.
FIGURE B.3.2(b) Skills Checklist.
While the differences between job performance requirements and instructional objectives aresubtle in appearance, the purpose of each statement differs greatly. JPRs state what is necessaryto perform the job in the “real world.” Instructional objectives, however, are used to identifywhat students must do at the end of a training session and are stated in behavioral terms that aremeasurable in the training environment.
By converting JPRs into instructional objectives, instructors will be able to clarify performanceexpectations and avoid confusion related to using statements designed for purposes other thanteaching. Additionally, instructors will be able to add local/state/regional elements ofperformance into the standards as intended by the developers.
Requisite skills and knowledge should be converted into enabling objectives. The enablingobjectives help to define the course content. The course content should include the requisiteknowledge and skills. Using Figure B.3.2(b) as an example, the enabling objectives are localprocedures for establishing a water shuttle dump site, principles of water transfer betweenmultiple portable water tanks, connection and operation of water transfer equipment, and soforth. These enabling objectives ensure that the course content supports the terminal objective.
Note that it is assumed that the reader is familiar with curriculum development or trainingdesign and evaluation.
B.4 Other Uses.
105
Copyright NFPA
While the professional qualifications standards are principally used to guide the developmentof training and certification programs, there are a number of other potential uses for thedocuments. Because the documents are written using JPR terms, they lend themselves well toany area of the profession where a level of performance or expertise must be determined.
These areas might include the following:
(1) Employee Evaluation/Performance Critiquing. The JPRs can be used as a guide by boththe supervisor and the employee during an evaluation. The JPRs for a specific jobdefine tasks that are essential to perform on the job as well as the evaluation criteria tomeasure when those tasks are completed.
(2) Establishing Hiring Criteria. The professional qualifications standards can be used in anumber of ways to further the establishment of hiring criteria. The AHJ could simplyrequire certification at a specific job level (e.g., driver/operator — pumps). The JPRscould also be used as the basis for pre-employment screening by establishing essentialminimal tasks and the related evaluation criteria. An added benefit is that individualsinterested in employment can work toward the minimal hiring criteria at local colleges.
(3) Employee Development. The professional qualifications standards can be useful to boththe employee and the employer in developing a plan for an individual’s growth withinan organization. The JPRs and the associated requisite knowledge and skills can be usedas a guide to determine additional training and education required for the employee tomaster the job or profession.
(4) Succession Planning. Succession planning or career pathing addresses the efficientplacement of people into jobs in response to current needs and anticipated future needs.A career development path can be established for targeted individuals to prepare themfor growth within an organization. The JPRs and requisite knowledge and skills couldthen be used to develop an educational path to aid in the individual’s advancementwithin the organization or profession.
(5) Establishing Organizational Policies, Procedures, and Goals. The JPRs can beincorporated into organizational policies, procedures, and goals where employeeperformance is addressed.
Annex C Informational References
C.1 Referenced Publications.
The following documents or portions thereof are referenced within this standard forinformational purposes only and are thus not part of the requirements of this document unlessalso listed in Chapter 2.
C.1.1 NFPA Publication. National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O.
106
Copyright NFPA
Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101.
NFPA 1001, Standard for Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 2002 edition.
C.1.2 Other Publications.
C.1.2.1 U.S. Government Publication. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC20402.
Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 383, “Commercial Driver’s License Standards:Requirements and Penalties,” 383.110:29.
C.1.2.2 Other Publication.
Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of the English Language.
C.2 Informational References.
The following documents or portions thereof are listed here as informational resources only.They are not a part of the requirements of this document. The following is a bibliography forAnnex B.
Boyatzis, R. E., The Competent Manager: A Model For Effective Performance. New York:John Wiley & Sons, 1982.
Castle, D. K., “Management Design: A Competency Approach to Create ExemplarPerformers.” Performance and Instruction 28: 1989; 42–48.
Cetron, M., and O’Toole, T., Encounters with the Future: A Forecast into the 21st Century.New York: McGraw Hill, 1983.
Elkin, G., “Competency-Based Human Resource Development: Making Sense of the Ideas.”Industrial & Commercial Training 22: 1990; 20–25.
Furnham, A., “The Question of Competency.” Personnel Management 22: 1990; 37.
Gilley, J. W., and Eggland, S. A., Principles of Human Resource Development. Reading, MA:Addison-Wesley, 1989.
Hooton, J., Job Performance = Tasks + Competency × Future Forces. Unpublishedmanuscript, Vanderbilt University, Peabody College, Nashville, TN, 1990.
McLagan, P. A., “Models for HRD Practice.” Training & Development Journal. Reprinted,1989.
McLagan, P. A., and Suhadolnik, D., The Research Report. Alexandria, VA: American Societyfor Training and Development, 1989.
Nadler, L., “HRD on the Spaceship Earth.” Training and Development Journal, October 1983;19–22.
Nadler, L., The Handbook of Human Resource Development. New York: Wiley-Interscience,
107
Copyright NFPA
1984.
Naisbitt, J., Megatrends. Chicago: Nightingale-Conant, 1984.
Spellman, B. P., “Future Competencies of the Educational Public Relations Specialist”(Doctoral dissertation, University of Houston, 1987). Dissertation Abstracts International 49:1987; 02A.
Springer, J., Job Performance Standards and Measures. A series of research presentations anddiscussions for the ASTD Second Annual Invitational Research Seminar, Savannah, GA(November 5–8, 1979). Madison, WI: American Society for Training and Development, 1980.
Tracey, W. R., Designing Training and Development Systems. New York: AMACOM, 1984.
C.3 References for Extracts.
The following documents are listed here to provide reference information, including title andedition, for extracts given throughout this standard as indicated by a reference in brackets [ ]following a section or paragraph. These documents are not a part of the requirements of thisdocument unless also listed in Chapter 2 for other reasons.
NFPA 1000, Standard for Fire Service Professional Qualifications Accreditation andCertification Systems, 2000 edition.
NFPA 1031, Standard for Professional Qualifications for Fire Inspector and Plan Examiner,2003 edition.
NFPA 1710, Standard for the Organization and Deployment of Fire Suppression Operations,Emergency Medical Operations, and Special Operations to the Public by Career FireDepartments, 2001 edition.
NFPA 1901, Standard for Automotive Fire Apparatus, 2003 edition.
NFPA 1906, Standard for Wildland Fire Apparatus, 2001 edition.
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 1
Contents
IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroduction ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................22222
Using YUsing YUsing YUsing YUsing Your Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™ ...................................................................... 33333The Controls .................................................................................... 3Jacobs Engine Brake Operation ..................................................... 4
Driving with YDriving with YDriving with YDriving with YDriving with Your Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brake ................................... 7Flat, Dry Pavement ........................................................................... 7Descending a Grade ........................................................................ 8Slippery Pavement ........................................................................ 10
Maintenance and SerMaintenance and SerMaintenance and SerMaintenance and SerMaintenance and Serv icevicevicevicevice ....................................................................................................................................... 1 21 21 21 21 2Recommended Preventive Maintenance Schedule ...................... 13
WWWWWarararara rranty Coverage and Prranty Coverage and Prranty Coverage and Prranty Coverage and Prranty Coverage and Procedurocedurocedurocedurocedureseseseses ............................................. 1 41 41 41 41 4
For MorFor MorFor MorFor MorFor More Infore Infore Infore Infore Informationmationmationmationmation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1 41 41 41 41 4
126
2 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Introduction
Congratulations! Your vehicle is equipped with the original Jacobs EngineBrake™. The Jacobs Engine Brake (also known as the “Jake Brake® enginebrake) is widely recognized throughout the trucking industry for its quality,reliability and performance. This manual contains useful information on theoperation and maintenance of your Jacobs Engine Brake. Read this manualthoroughly and fully understand the engine brake system before you driveyour Jacobs Engine Brake-equipped vehicle.
The Jacobs Engine Brake is a diesel engine retarder that uses the engineto aid in slowing and controlling the vehicle. When activated, the enginebrake alters the operation of the engine’s exhaust valves so that the engineworks as a power-absorbing air compressor. This provides a retarding, orslowing, action to the vehicle’s drive wheels, enabling you to have improvedvehicle control without using the service brakes. This results in reducedservice brake maintenance, shorter trip times, and lower overall operatingcosts.
Statements marked with this symbol indicatepotentially dangerous conditions including thepossibility of personal injury.
Statements marked with this symbol are important for thesafe use and care of the Jacobs Engine Brake.
Please refer to the operator’s manual provided by the manufacturer ofyour vehicle for additional information and operations that may differfrom those described in this manual.
127
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 3
Using YUsing YUsing YUsing YUsing Your Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brakeour Jacobs Engine Brake™™™™™
The Jacobs Engine Brake™ is a vehicle-slowingdevice, not a vehicle-stopping device. It is not a
substitute for the service braking system. The vehicle’s service brakesmust be used to bring the vehicle to a complete stop. However, byappropriately using the engine brake for your slowing needs, theservice brakes remain cool and ready to provide their maximumstopping power.
Driver Controls
It is important to familiarize yourself with the Jacobs Engine Brakecontrols in your vehicle. The controls will vary slightly depending on theengine brake configuration and cab design, as discussed below. However,basic operator controls will be similar for all models. All vehicles withmanual transmissions will allow the driver to turn the engine brake on andoff and select a level of braking. Below are illustrations of the varioustypes of switches that you may find in your vehicle. Note: Switchessupplied by Jacobs Vehicle Systems may be different from the onesinstalled in your vehicle (physical appearance varies but function should not).
The operations tied to these switches are as follows (for a typical in-line 6cylinder engine):
Low/High Switch: The “low” setting activatesthree cylinders, yielding approximately 50%braking horsepower. The “high” setting willactivate all six cylinders, providing full brakinghorsepower.
Low/Med/High Switch: The “Low” settingactivates two cylinders, yielding approximatelyone-third total braking horsepower. The “Medium”setting activates four cylinders, yieldingapproximately two thirds braking horsepower. The“high” setting will activate all six cylinders,providing full braking horsepower.
Additionally, a foot-operated switch may be offered to give you control ofthe on/off function of the Jacobs Engine Brake. Some vehiclemanufacturers offer a gear lever selector switch for the engine brake.
Additionally, a foot-operated switch may be offered to give you control ofthe on/off function of the Jacobs Engine Brake. Some vehiclemanufacturers offer a gear lever selector switch for the engine brake.
128
4 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Engine Controls
All Jacobs Engine Brakes have two additional controls: one activated bythe position of the clutch pedal, and the other by the position of thethrottle. The two controls can provide for fully automatic operation of theJacobs Engine Brake™.
Jacobs Engine Brake Operation
The Jacobs Engine Brake depends on the free flow ofengine oil for operation, so be sure to let the engine
reach full operating temperature before switching on the enginebrake. Normally, the engine brake is then left in the “On” position wheneveryou are driving. The exception is when roads are slippery due to badweather conditions. Refer to the section entitled “Slippery Pavement” forspecific operating instructions.
The operation of the JacobsEngine Brake is fully automatic,once it is turned on. When yourfoot is off the clutch and youremove your foot completely fromthe throttle, the engine brake isautomatically activated. (There aresome systems that will activateonly once the brake pedal isdepressed.)
When you apply pressure to thethrottle, the Jacobs Engine Brakeis deactivated.
129
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 5
While shifting gears, the enginebrake is automatically deactivatedwhen you depress the clutchpedal.
If the enginebrake is on,
shifting without using the clutch ordouble-clutching (to use the enginebrake to reduce engine rpm--alsoknown as “Jake Shifting”) isstrongly discouraged. Seriouspowertrain damage or enginestalling/loss of vehicle controlcan result.
Note that the Jacobs EngineBrake™ will also remain activatedafter the brake pedal has beendepressed, giving the combinedpower of both the engine brake andthe service brakes to the drivewheels.
ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System)equipped vehicles have the ability toturn the engine brake off if a wheelslip condition is detected. The enginebrake will automatically be turned back on whenwheel slip is no longer detected.
On vehicles equipped with electronic engine controls, the controls willdeactivate the engine brake when engine speed falls below approximately1000 rpm or when the vehicle slows down to a pre-set speed, which variesdepending on the vehicle and engine configuration. This prevents stallingthe engine. On vehicles equipped with mechanical engine controls andmanual transmissions, depress the clutch pedal at low speeds to preventstalling the engine. (Alternatively, a low-speed cutoff control may beinstalled to ensure deactivation of the engine brake at low vehicle speeds.)
Be sure to turn off the engine brake dashboard switchwhen you shut the engine down. This will prevent theswitch from being in the “on” position at engine coldstart.
130
6 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Automatic Transmissions
If you have an automatic transmission, operation of the Jacobs EngineBrake™ functions basically in the same manner for vehicles with manualtransmissions. The engine brake is activated when you move your foot offthe throttle, and deactivated when you apply pressure to the throttle. Apressure-sensing switch (or the electronic engine controls) will deactivatethe Jacobs Engine Brake when the engine speed falls belowapproximately 1000 rpm, or when the transmission shifts from lock-up toconverter operation (usually about 10-25 mph, depnending on thetransmission type). NOTE: With “Autoshift” type transmissions, theengine brake may actuate to help the transmission upshift. This isdone automatically through the transmission control module, andcan happen even if the engine brake dash switch is in the “off”position.
Cruise Control
There are several types of cruise control systems, and operation of theJacobs Engine Brake in vehicles equipped with cruise control will dependon the engine and options provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Somecruise controls are specifically designed to operate in conjunction with theJacobs Engine Brake. It may be possible to program activation of theengine brake during cruise control operation. When enabled, the systemactivates the engine brake when the vehicle exceeds the cruise controlset speed. The engine brake will operate until the vehicle has slowed to1/2 mph above cruise control set speed. Refer to the vehicle operator’smanual for additional information.
131
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 7
Driving with YDriving with YDriving with YDriving with YDriving with Your Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™our Jacobs Engine Brake™
Since the engine brake is mosteffective at higher engine speeds,gear selection is very important. Youobtain maximum retarding powerwhen you use the lowest possiblegear without exceeding therecommended engine speed forengine braking. Best retardingperformance is obtained at enginespeeds between 1800 rpm and highidle. Below 1700 rpm, retardingpower may be significantly reduced.
The Jacobs Engine Brake must be turned on at the dash switch in order tooperate. Once it is turned on, merely take your foot off the throttle to slowyour vehicle. The Jacobs Engine Brake goes into action, providing retard-ing power to the vehicle. Apply the service brakes when it’s time to cometo a complete stop. See the sections below for driving procedures forspecific conditions.
Flat, Dry Pavement
If you are driving on flat, open stretches with alight load and greater slowing power isn’t re-quired, place the progressive braking switch inthe “Low” position. If you find that you are stillusing the service brakes, move the switch to ahigher position until you do not need to use theservice brakes.
Braking Horsepower vs. Engine RPM
Braking Horsepower
Engi
ne R
PM
When you are carrying a heavier load or de-scending a grade, and the pavement is dry andtraction is good, your progressive braking switchshould be in the “High” position.
Bra
kin
g H
ors
epo
wer
Engine RPM
132
8 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Note: The following road speedsand grades are given as examplesonly! Actual conditions and enginebraking performance will vary.
Depending on road and loadconditions, without using yourservice brakes you may be able todescend a 6% grade safely at 10mph without a Jacobs EngineBrake.
An explanation of “control speed” ishelpful in understanding how to usethe Jacobs Engine Brake whiledescending a grade. Control speedis the constant speed at which theforces pushing the vehicle forwardon a grade are equal to the forcesholding it back, without using theservice brakes. In other words, thespeed the vehicle will maintainwithout using the service brakes orthe throttle.
Descending a Grade
Before beginning a long, steep descent, determine if your JacobsEngine Brake™ is operating properly. This can be done by liftingyour foot briefly off the throttle. You will feel the Jacobs Engine Brakeactivate.
133
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 9
80,000 lbs.
Under some circumstances, youmay want to come down a grade ata faster rate than the control speed.This can be done by selecting ahigher gear, or a lower position onthe progressive braking switch.However, you may have to applyyour service brakes intermittently toprevent overspeeding the engine andto keep the vehicle at a safe speed.
Frequent use ofthe service brakes
will cause them to heat up,reducing their stopping ability. Theresult can be dangerous brake fade.
There may be circumstances in which you might want to descend a gradeat a rate slower than the control speed. This is done by selecting a lowergear, one that will not overspeed the engine. You may have to apply theservice brakes to obtain the desired lower speed.
Like any product, the Jacobs Engine Brake can be abused. Take, forinstance, the above example of the 6% grade, which you could descendunder control only at 10 mph without an engine brake, but at 25 mph withan engine brake. You could not descend that same hill at 50 mph and stillexpect to remain under control. Get to know how much slowing power yourengine brake can provide. Never exceed a safe control speed.
With the Jacobs Engine Brake™set to the “High” position, youmight be able to descend thatsame grade at 25 mph, and stillremain under control without usingyour service brakes. The enginebrake can be kept on for as longas needed without any risk ofengine overheating or damage.
134
10 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Slippery Pavement
Since the operation of any vehicle under slippery conditions isunpredictable, be sure you have plenty of distance when testing servicebrakes or your Jacobs Engine Brake™.
The Jacobs Engine Brake will not affect the operation of ABS (Anti-lockBraking System) on vehicles so equipped. The ABS systems shoulddeactivate the engine brake when wheel slip occurs and traction is lost,and will reactivate the engine brake when the ABS system hasdisengaged.
If the Jacobs Engine Brake is new to you, it is recommended that you donot attempt to use it on slippery roads until you have some experiencewith it on dry pavement. When you have that experience, you may use thefollowing operation sequence as a guideline.
Do not use the Jacobs Engine Brake when bobtailingor pulling an empty trailer on wet or slipperypavement, especially when operating a single driveaxle vehicle.
Slippery Pavement Driving Procedures
When driving on wet or icy pavement, start with the master switch in the“Off” position and use the same gear you would normally use under theseconditions.
Before activating the engine brake, be sure that you have plenty ofdistance between your vehicle and other vehicles and that trafficconditions allow for testing of vehicle braking. Also make sure that thevehicle is maintaining traction and stability using the natural retarding ofthe engine alone. If the retarding of the engine alone without the enginebrake causes any loss of traction, do not attempt to use the engine brakeuntil road conditions improve.
135
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 11
If the vehicle is maintaining traction, you maythen activate the Jacobs Engine Brake™ byturning the switch to the “Low” position.
If the tractor drive wheels begin to lock or thereis a fishtail motion, immediately turn the switchoff and don’t turn the Jacobs Engine Brake onuntil road conditions improve.
If there was no tendency for the drive wheelsto lose traction and you desire greater slowingpower, move the braking switch to the nexthighest position.
If the drive wheels tend to lock or there is afishtail motion, immediately switch the enginebrake into the low position. Do not attempt touse a higher position until road conditionsimprove.
Check your progressive braking switch for properposition often, since road conditions can changequickly. Remember: never skip a step when operatingthe progressive braking switch. Always go from off tolow position and then to a higher position.
On single trailers or combinations, a light air application of the trailerbrakes may be desirable to help keep the trailer stretched out. Follow themanufacturer’s recommended operating procedure when using your trailerbrakes.
If your tractor is equipped with tandem axles and a power divider, theJacobs Engine Brake will not change the normal usage of this equipmenton icy roads. See the manufacturer’s recommendations for the proper useof this equipment.
136
12 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Maintenance and Service
Jacobs Engine Brakes are recognized as one of the most reliablecomponents on today’s diesel-powered vehicles. However, inspections androutine maintenance are necessary to ensure proper operation. In addition,periodic service will help reduce maintenance costs, unscheduled serviceand downtime. With every routine engine maintenance, have your enginebrake inspected and serviced. If, for some reason, the engine brake willnot shut off when your foot is on the throttle, immediately pull off the roadand call for service.
Maintain your Jacobs Engine Brake™ with genuine Jacobs replacementparts. Use of other than Jacobs approved parts may result in reducedperformance, serious engine damage and loss of warranty protection.
137
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 13
Recommended Preventive Maintenance Schedule
The service intervals presented here are intended as a guide forestablishing a routine of Jacobs Engine Brake™ inspection andmaintenance in conjunction with scheduled engine maintenance.Reference your engine manufacturer’s service manual for specificmaintenance intervals.
Severe driving conditions, types of roads and driving areas will affect thelength of time between scheduled maintenance. Engine brakes which areexposed to severe applications and operating environments may requiremore frequent preventive maintenance.
100,000 miles 300,000 miles 500,000 milesPart 3,000 hours 9,000 hours 15,000 hours
Wiring, Terminal Connections I I IClutch/Throttle/Buffer Screw A A/R A/RLash Adjusting Screw A/I A/I A/RSolenoid Valves I RCrosshead/Bridges/Valve Stem Caps I IInjector/Exhaust Rocker Arms Screws I I IMaster Piston/Fork Assembly I ISlave Pistons IExternal Hose Assembly I I IHousings I IFuel Pipes I I IHold Down Bolts I RAccumulator Springs* RSolenoid Harness* R ISolenoid Seal Rings* R IControl Valve Springs* R IControl Valves* R IOil Seal Rings* I R IMaster Piston Return Springs* I R ITerminal Lead Out* I R ICrosshead Pin Assembly* I R I
I = Inspect and replace as required A = Adjust R = Replace*contained in tune-up kits
138
14 Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual
Warranty Coverage and Procedures
The unrivaled reliability of the Jacobs Engine Brake™ makes it unlikelythat you will need to file a warranty claim. Jacobs Vehicle Systems, Inc.and the engine manufacturers back the Jacobs Engine Brake with limitedwarranty coverage. Refer to the appropriate section of your enginemanufacturer’s warranty for specific engine brake warranty information.The Jacobs Engine Brake warranty is administered through vehicle orengine dealers as an engine component.
For More Information
If you would like more information or have specific questions, pleaseask your local vehicle dealer or engine dealer, or visit us on theInternet at: www.jakebrake.com.
139
Jacobs Engine Brake™ Operator’s Manual 15
Notes
140
Unoffic
ial
Operating the Detroit Diesel Electronic Fire Commander(EFC):
MODES:There are two modes of operation for the Electronic Fire Commander. The RPMMode controls the engine speed to a desired RPM and the Pressure Mode controlsthe engine speed to maintain a desired pump discharge pressure. The operatingmode of the Fire Commander can be changed from RPM Mode to Pressure Modeand back without the need to return to idle. When the MODE switch is pressed, theFire Commander will change from one mode to the other and utilize the RPM orPump Pressure that is current at the time the change is made for engine control.
manuals\efc\efc-2.ai
141
Unoffic
ialRPM Mode:
The EFC must be on and the Throttle Ready LED (interlocks necessary for increasedthrottle operations are active) must be illuminated before any RPM adjustments can bemade. The RPM LED will be on to indicate that the EFC will operate in the RPMmode.
Engine speed can be controlled to a predetermined RPM by pressing the PRESETswitch. (PROGRAMMABLE FROM THE EFC MENU)Engine speed can be increased in 25 RPM increments using the INC switch.Engine speed can be decreased in 25 RPM increments using the DEC switch.
Pressing the IDLE switch will return the engine RPM to it’s normal curb idle speed.
PSI Mode:The EFC must be on and the PUMP ENGAGED, OKAY TO PUMP and theTHROTTLE READY LEDs (safety interlocks for pump operation have been established)must all be illuminated before anyPSI adjustments can be made. The PRESSURELED will be on to indicate that the EFC can be operated in the PSI Mode.
Pump Pressure can be controlled to a predetermined PSI by pressing the PRESETswitch.Pump Pressure can be increased in 4 PSI increments using the INC switch.Pump Pressure can be decreased in 4 PSI increments using the DEC switch.
Pressing the IDLE switch will return the engine to it’s normal idle speed.
Engine Parameters:Engine RPM, Oil Pressure, Temperature, and System Voltage are displayed continu-ously while the EFC is in operation. In addition to this, any operating parameter thatwould cause a Check Engine or Stop Engine Condition will be displayed on the EFC’sInformation Center Message Display and an audible alarm will be activated.
Operating the Detroit Diesel Electronic Fire Commander:
142
Unoffic
ialProgramming the EFC is simply a matter of selecting items from a menu.
To enter the programming menu, Press and hold the MODE and MENU switches at thesame time until “Press Idle to Exit “ is displayed on the information center, then release bothswitches.Moving through the menu is accomplished by pressing the MENU switch.Change to a selection is performed by using the INC and DEC switches.Exiting the programming menu is done in one of two ways.
Pressing IDLE will exit the menu and save changes.Pressing MODE will exit the menu without saving changes.
Programming Menu Options:
RPM Preset Point: (preset engine speed)Pressure Set (PSI): (preset PSI)Engine Hourmeter: (information only)Pump Hourmeter: (information only)Engine Degrees: (oil or coolant)Pump Pressure (PSI): (pressure reading if active)DDEC Software Ver: (ECU revision level)EFC Software Ver: (EFC revision level)Fire Commander I/O Test: (test switches)Press [MODE] Test Lights: (tests display panel)Set Time Clock: (set clock)Units of Measure: (English/Metric)Welcome Message: (enable/disable)Codes Currently Active: (information)Connector Data: (displays connection info.)SAVE? [Idle=Y] [Mode=N] (exit and save options)
Use the MENU switch to scroll through the menu.
Use the INC and DEC switches when the item you want to change is displayed.
When changes are complete, press IDLE to exit and save changes.To exit the menu without saving changes, press MODE.
Programming the Detroit Diesel Electronic Fire Commander:
143
Unoffic
ial
Troubleshooting the Detroit Diesel Electronic Fire Commander:The DDEC III ECM must be programmed for Pressure Sensor Governing and theDigital I/O’s must be configured properly for PSG operation. Additionally the VSSshould be turned off in pressure governor operation.
You can use the EFC I/O test as an aid in troubleshooting.The INC, DEC, IDLE,MODE and PRESET switches as well as their outputs are tested.DISPLAY
SWITCH: OUTPUT:
When a switch is pressed (IDLE for instance), it will show up as:SWITCH: IDLE and if the output is grounded with the switch, that will show up asSWITCH: IDLE OUTPUT: IDLE.If an output is grounded, it will show up as OUTPUT: (function name).This can be used to test for a grounded signal wire.
The throttle won’t increase in RPM Mode.Check:
Is the THROTTLE READY LED on? The EFC won’t respond in RPM mode unlessthe OEM safety interlock requirements that enable the throttle are met.Try using both the PRESET and INC switches.Does PSG Disabled display on the information center?If operating with PTO, is VSS enabled?Re-initialize the EFC. (Remove power to the EFC wait 10 seconds and then repowerthe unit and try again.)
NOTE: The EFC performs a self-check when it is powered up. This is indicated on theEFC by a momentary lighting of all the display segments.
The throttle won’t increase in Pressure Mode.Check:
Are all three LED’s (PUMP ENGAGED, OKAY TO PUMP, and THROTTLE READY)on?Try both the INC and PRESET Switches to increase pump pressure.Is the VSS enabled?Re-initialize the EFC.
The THROTTLE READY LED won’t turn on.Check:
Is the parking brake on?Is the transmission in neutral or the PTO engaged?Check for 12 VDC at pin # 2 of the EFC 12 pin connector.
The Engine Data Display is showing all zeroes or dashes.Check:
Are the connections at pins # 3 and # 4 of the EFC 4 pin connector attached?
144
Unoffic
ial
Troubleshooting the Detroit Diesel Electronic Fire Commander:The PUMP ENGAGED and OKAY to PUMP LED’s won’t turn on.
Check:All OEM safety requirements for pump operation must be fulfilled.Is the Parking Brake on?Is the transmission in the proper range for pump operation?Is the PTO engaged?Is there an OK to PUMP Signal in the cab?Check for 12 VDC at pin #10 of the EFC 12 pin connector.
The mode won’t change from RPM to Pressure.Check:
Are the PUMP ENGAGED and OKAY to PUMP LED’s on?Is there a ground at pin #1 of the EFC 12 pin connector?Is there a ground at pin #4 of the EFC 12 pin connector?
The PRESET switch doesn’t work:Check:
Are the proper LED’s on for the mode you want to operate?Is there a valid preset programmed into the menu?Does the PRESET switch work in the menu I/O test?
The EFC doesn’t light up.Check:
Are the necessary switches turned on?Is there 12 VDC between pins #1 and #2 at the EFC 4 pin connector.
Summary:The DDC Pressure Sensor Governor operates similar to cruise control. It uses theDDEC III digital inputs and outputs (ground) to control the engine and indicators.
Digital Inputs Pressure Governor System Enable (ground when enabled)Pressure/RPM Mode Switch (groundParking Brake InterlockSet/Coast On (Decrease) (ground to decrease)Resume/Acceleration On (Increase) (ground to Increase)
These inputs are programmed into the DDEC ECU and the configuration may vary, acheck should be done at installation to verify which port is configured for what input.
Digital Outputs Cruise Control Active Light (ground when active)Pressure Governor Active Light (ground when PSG pressurePSG Pressure Mode Achieved mode is active)
These outputs are programmed into the DDEC ECU and the configuration may vary, acheck should be done at installation to verify which port is configured for what output.
145
Read instruction manual before use. Operation of this nozzle without
understanding the manual and receiving proper training can be dangerous and is
a misuse of this equipment. Call 800-348-2686 with any questions.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
This manual should be kept available to all operating and maintenance
personnel.
This instruction manual is intended to familiarize firefighters and maintenance
personnel with the operation, servicing and safety procedures associated with
the Ultimatic, Mid-Matic and Handline fire fighting nozzles.
MID-MATICULTIMATIC, & HANDLINEULTIMATIC,
TFT HAND HELD AUTOMATIC
PRESSURE CONTROL NOZZLES
ULTIMATIC MID-MATIC
HANDLINE
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
2800 E Evans Ave • Valparaiso , IN 46383-6940 USA
800-348-2686 • 219-462-6161 • Fax 219-464-7155Made in USA • www.tft.comTASK FORCE TIPS, Inc.
146
1.0 MEANING OF SIGNAL WORDS
2.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 VARIOUS MODELS AND TERMS
2.2 COLOR CODED VALVE HANDLE COVERS - MIDMATIC & HANDLINE ONLY
3.0 FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
4.0 NOZZLE CONTROLS
4.1 FLOW CONTROL
4.1.1 LEVER TYPE FLOW CONTROL
4.1.2 TWIST SHUTOFF
4.1.3 TIP ONLY NOZZLES
4.2 PATTERN AND FLUSH CONTROL
4.2.1 PATTERN CONTROL
4.2.2 FLUSH CONTROL5
5.0 USE OF ULTIMATIC, MIDMATIC & HANDLINE NOZZLES
6.0 FIELD INSPECTION
7.0 WARRANTY
8.0 ANSWERS TO YOUR QUESTIONS
9.0 NOZZLE FLOW CHARTS
10.0 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 MEANING OF SIGNAL WORDSA safety related message is identified by a safety alert symbol and a signal word to indicate the level of risk involved
with a particular hazard. Per ANSI standard Z535.4-1998 the definitions of the three signal words are as follows:
DANGER
CAUTION
WARNING
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury.
2LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
147
SERIES FLOW RANGE NOMINAL PRESSURE STANDARD COUPLING*
GPM L/min PSI BAR
10-125 40-500 100 7 1, 1-1/2 NH or 1-1/4 NPSHULTIMATIC
10-100 40-400 75 6 1 or 1-1/2 NH or 1-1/4 NPSH
70-200 100 1-1/2 NHMID-MATIC
70-200 100-600 75 6 1-1/2 NH
95-300 190-1350 100 7 1-1/2 or 2-1/2 NH
95-250 200-950 75 6HANDLINE
1-1/2 or 2-1/2 NH
The Task Force Tips Ultimatic, MID-MATIC and Handline nozzles are designed to provide excellent performance under
most fire fighting conditions. Their rugged construction is compatible with the use of fresh water (see section 5.0 for
saltwater use) as well as fire fighting foam solutions. Other important operating features are:
Slide valve with valve handle detent flow control for excellent stream quality at all valve positions
Quick-acting pattern control from straight stream to wide fog
"Power fog teeth" for full-fill fog
"Gasket grabber" inlet screen to keep large debris from entering nozzle
Easily flushable while flowing to clear trapped debris
TFT's five-year warranty and unsurpassed customer service
-
-
-
-
-
-
2.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 VARIOUS MODELS AND TERMS
FIGURE 1 COMMON MODELS AND TERMS
NOZZLE WITH VALVE
and INTEGRAL PISTOL GRIPTIP ONLY NOZZLE
COUPLING
RUBBER
GASKET
PISTOL
GRIP
STREAM
SHAPERON
FLOW CONTRO
L
OFF
BARREL LABEL
NAME LABEL
* Other threads, coupling sizes, or connector styles can be specified at time of order.
Ultimatic, MID-MATIC and Handline nozzles are available in several models. Some common models are shown
in figure 1.
3
Nozzle must be mated to a hose line with matched threads. Mismatched or
damaged threads may cause nozzle to leak or uncouple from hose under
pressure and could cause injury.
CAUTION
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
148
4
The TFT MID-MATIC & HANDLINE with lever type valve handles are supplied with black valve handle covers. The handle
covers are available from TFT in various colors for those departments wishing to color code the nozzle to the discharge
controls. A colored handle cover set will be sent upon receipt of the warranty card by TFT. Your department's name can
also be engraved on the covers (see warranty card for more information).
Handle covers are replaceable by removing the four screws that hold the handle covers in place. Use a 3/32" allen
wrench when replacing screws.
2.2 COLOR CODED VALVE HANDLE COVERS MID-MATIC & HANDLINE ONLY
For standardization NFPA 1901 (A-4-9.3) recommends the following color code scheme:
Preconnect #1 or Bumper Jump Line Orange
Preconnect or discharge #2 Red
Preconnect or discharge #3 Yellow
Preconnect or discharge #4 White
Preconnect or discharge #5 Blue
Preconnect or discharge #6 Black
Preconnect or discharge #7 Green
Foam Lines Red w/ White border (Red/White)
3.0 FLOW CHARACTERISTICSThe graphs in figure 2 show the typical performance of ULTIMATIC, MID-MATIC and HANDLINE nozzles.
100 PSI ULTIMATIC, MID-MATIC & HANDLINE
VALVE HANDLE
NOZZLE WITH VALVE TIP ONLY NOZZLE
WITH TWIST SHUTOFF
VALVE POSITION
LABEL
GASKET
GRABBER
INLET
SCREEN
DETENTS
VALVE RING
FIGURE 1 COMMON MODELS AND TERMS
FLOW (GPM)
NO
ZZ
LE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(PS
I)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0 20 40 24060 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 260 280 300 320 340 360
MID-MATICULTIMATIC
HANDLINE
MID-MATIC
FLOW RANGE
HANDLINE
FLOW RANGE
ULTIMATIC
FLOW RANGE
200 400 600 800 1000 1200
FLOW (GPM)
FLOW (LPM)
2
4
6
8N
OZ
ZL
EP
RE
SS
UR
E(B
AR
)
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
149
NO
ZZ
LE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(PS
I)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0 20 40 24060 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 260 280
HANDLINE
FLOW RANGE
200 400 600 800 1000
FLOW (GPM)
FLOW (LPM)
2
4
6
8
NO
ZZ
LE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
75 PSI ULTIMATIC 75 PSI MID-MATIC
ULTIMATIC
FLOW RANGE
MID-MATIC
FLOW RANGE
75 PSI HANDLINE
Failure to restrain nozzle reaction can cause firefighter injury from loss of
footing and/or stream protection. Nozzle reaction will vary as supply
conditions change: such as opening or closing other nozzles, hose line
kinks, changes in pump settings, etc. Changes in spray pattern or flushing
will also affect nozzle reaction. The nozzle operator must always be
positioned to restrain the nozzle reaction in the event of those changes.
An inadequate supply of nozzle pressure and/or flow will cause an
ineffective stream and can result in injury, death or loss of property. See
flow chart in section 8.0 or call 800-348-2686 for assistance.
Fire streams are capable of injury and damage. Do not direct water stream
to cause injury or damage to persons or property.
Injury from whipping can occur. If nozzle gets out of control or away from
operator, retreat from nozzle immediately. Do not attempt to regain control
of nozzle while flowing water.
4.0 NOZZLE CONTROLS
On models that use a lever type valve handle, the nozzle is shut off when the handle is fully forward. The valve handle has
six detent flow positions. These detent positions allow the nozzle operator to regulate the flow of the nozzle depending on
the need or what can be safely and effectively handled. TFT recommends the use of a pistol grip for easier handling. For
additional stress reduction, a hose rope or strap may also be used. This permits more effective use and ease of
advancement, while minimizing strain and fatigue.
4.1 FLOW CONTROL
4.1.1 LEVER TYPE FLOW CONTROL
5
DANGER
CAUTION
WARNING
WARNING
FIGURE 2
The charts in section 8.0 of this document give specific examples of maximum flow rates for particular situations. Friction
losses may vary due to differences in hose construction resulting in flows different than those shown. For situations or
lengths of hose not listed on the chart, approximate flows can be calculated using conventional hydraulics.
75 PSI ULTIMATIC, MID-MATIC & HANDLINE
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
150
6
4.2.2 FLUSH CONTROL
Small debris passes through the gasket grabber and may get caught inside the nozzle. This trapped material will cause
poor stream quality, shortened reach and reduced flow. To remove this trapped debris the nozzle can be flushed as
follows; while still flowing water, turn the SHAPER counterclockwise past the full fog position (increased resistance will be
felt on the SHAPER as the nozzle goes into flush). This will open the nozzle allowing debris to pass through. Rotate the
SHAPER clockwise and out of flush to continue normal operation. During flush the nozzle reaction will decrease as the
pattern becomes wider and the pressure drops. The nozzle operator must be prepared for an increase of nozzle reaction
when returning the nozzle from the flush position to retain control of the nozzle.
Large amounts of debris can reduce
the flow of the nozzle resulting in an
ineffective flow. In the event of a
blockage it may be necessary to
retreat to a safe area, uncouple
nozzle and remove debris.
FIGURE 3 - GASKET GRABBER
WARNING
4.2 PATTERN AND FLUSH CONTROL
4.2.1 PATTERN CONTROL
TFT's ULTIMATIC, MID-MATIC and HANDLINE have full pattern control from straight stream to wide fog. Turning the
STREAM SHAPER clockwise (as seen from the operating position behind the nozzle) moves the SHAPER to the straight
stream position. Turning the SHAPER counterclockwise will result in an increasingly wider pattern.
Since the stream trim point varies with the flow, the stream should be "trimmed" after changing the flow to obtain the
straightest and farthest reaching stream. To properly trim a stream, first open the pattern to a narrow fog. Then close the
stream to parallel to give maximum reach.
The nozzle reaction is greatest when the shaper is in the straight stream position. The nozzle operator must be prepared
for a change in reaction as the pattern is changed.
NOTE: Turning the shaper further forward will cause stream crossover
and reduce the effective reach of the nozzle.
4.1.2 TWIST SHUTTOFF
4.1.3 TIP ONLY NOZZLES
On models that use a twist flow control. The valve is opened or
closed by rotating the valve ring. Rotating the ring clockwise (as
seen from the operating position behind the nozzle) closes the
valve, while counterclockwise rotation opens it. Detents are
provided at four intermediate positions and the position of the
valve is shown by the exposed valve position label.
Tip only nozzles have NO shut off valve contained within the
nozzle and be used with a separate ball valve attached to
the nozzle.
MUST
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
151
Any alterations to the nozzle and its markings could diminish safety and
constitutes a misuse of this product.
All Task Force Tip nozzles are factory lubricated with high quality silicone grease. This lubricant has excellent washout
resistance and long term performance. If your department has unusually hard or sandy water, the moving parts may be
affected. Foam agents and water additives contain soaps and chemicals that may break down the factory lubrication.
The moving parts of the nozzle should be checked on a regular basis for smooth and free operation, and signs of
damage. Any
nozzle that is not operating correctly should be immediately removed from service and the problem corrected.
IF THE NOZZLE IS OPERATING CORRECTLY, THEN NO ADDITIONAL LUBRICATION IS NEEDED.
TFT Item#
LIB-020
LHM-020
LIH-020
LDH-020
Title
Ultimatic 125 Service Procedure
Mid-Matic & Mid-Force Service Procedure
Handline Service Procedure
Handline & Dual-Force Service Procedure
Repair parts and service procedures are available for those wishing to perform their own repairs. Task Force Tips
assumes no liability for damage to equipment or injury to personnel that is a result of user service.
CAUTION
7
6.0 FIELD INSPECTION
TFT's ULTIMATIC, MID-MATIC and HANDLINE are designed and manufactured to be damage resistant and require
minimal maintenance. However, as the primary fire fighting tools upon which your life depends, they should be treated
accordingly.
Use with saltwater is permissible provided nozzle is thoroughly cleaned with fresh water after each use. The service life of
the nozzle may be shortened due to the effects of corrosion and is not covered under warranty.
Nozzle must be inspected for proper operation and function according to
inspection checklist on last page before each use. Any nozzle that fails
inspection is dangerous to use and must be repaired before using.
Performance tests shall be conducted on the Ultimatic, Mid-Matic and Handline nozzle after a repair, or anytime a
problem is reported to verify operation in accordance with TFT test procedures. Consult factory for the procedure that
corresponds to the model and serial number of the nozzle. Any equipment which fails the related test criteria should be
removed from service immediately. Troubleshooting guides are available with each test procedure or equipment can be
returned to the factory for service and testing.
Factory service is available with repair time seldom exceeding one day in our facility. Factory serviced nozzles are
repaired by experienced technicians to original specifications, fully tested and promptly returned. Any returns should
include a note as to the nature of the problem, who to reach in case of questions and if a repair estimate is required.
WARNING
5.0 USE OF ULTIMATIC, MID-MATIC and HANDLINE NOZZLES
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INDIVIDUAL FIRE DEPARTMENT OR AGENCY TO DETERMINE PHYSICAL
CAPABILITIES AND SUITABILITY FOR AN INDIVIDUAL'S USE OF THIS EQUIPMENT.
Many factors contribute to the extinguishment of a fire. Among the most important is delivering water at a flow rate
sufficient to absorb heat faster than it is being generated. The flow rate depends largely on the pump discharge pressure
and hose friction loss. The pump discharge pressure may be found by use of the chart in section 8.0. It can also be
calculated using a hydraulic equation such as:
For additional information on calculating specific hose
layouts, consult an appropriate fire service training manual,
, or call TFT's "Hydraulics Hotline"
at 800-348-2686.
A
Guide to Automatic Nozzles
PDP = NP+FL+DL+EL
= Pump discharge pressure in PSI
= Nozzle pressure in PSI
= Hose friction loss in PSI
= Device loss in PSI
= Elevation loss in PSI
PDP
NP
FL
DL
EL
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
152
7.0 WARRANTY
Task Force Tips, Inc., 2800 East Evans Avenue, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383 ("TFT") warrants to the original purchaser of its
Ultimatic, Mid-Matic, and Handline series nozzles ("equipment"), and to anyone to whom it is transferred, that the
equipment shall be free from defects in material and workmanship during the five (5) year period from the date of
purchase.
TFT's obligation under this warranty is specifically limited to replacing or repairing the equipment (or its parts) which are
shown by TFT's examination to be in a defective condition attributable to TFT. To qualify for this limited warranty, the
claimant must return the equipment to TFT, at 2800 East Evans Avenue, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383, within a reasonable
time after discovery of the defect. TFT will examine the equipment. If TFT determines that there is a defect attributable to
it, TFT will correct the problem within a reasonable time. If the equipment is covered by this limited warranty, TFT will
assume the expenses of repair.
If any defect attributable to TFT under this limited warranty cannot be reasonably cured by repair or replacement, TFT
may elect to refund the purchase price of the equipment, less reasonable depreciation, in complete discharge of its
obligations under this limited warranty. If TFT makes this election, claimant shall return the equipment to TFT free and
clear of any liens and encumbrances.
This is a limited warranty. The original purchaser of the equipment, any person to whom it is transferred, and any person
who is an intended or unintended beneficiary of the equipment, shall not be entitled to recover from TFT any
consequential or incidental damages for injury to person and/or property resulting from any defective equipment
manufactured or assembled by TFT. It is agreed and understood that the price stated for the equipment is in part
consideration for limiting TFT's liability. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above may not apply to you.
TFT shall have no obligation under this limited warranty if the equipment is, or has been, misused or neglected (including
failure to provide reasonable maintenance) or if there have been accidents to the equipment or if it has been repaired or
altered by someone else.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
THIS IS A LIMITED EXPRESS WARRANTY ONLY. TFT EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS WITH RESPECT TO THE
EQUIPMENT ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE IS NO WARRANTY OF ANY NATURE MADE BY TFT BEYOND THAT
STATED IN THIS DOCUMENT.
8.0 ANSWERS TO YOUR QUESTIONSWe appreciate the opportunity of serving you and making your job easier. If you have any problems or questions, our toll-
free "Hydraulics Hotline", 800-348-2686, is normally available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
8LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
153
= 75 PSI ULTIMATIC= 75 PSI ULTIMATIC= 100 PSI ULTIMATIC= 100 PSI ULTIMATIC ULTIMATIC 125 Flow ChartULTIMATIC 125 Flow Chart
150 ft.150 ft. 150 ft.150 ft. 150 ft.150 ft.200 ft.200 ft. 200 ft.200 ft. 200 ft.200 ft.250 ft.250 ft. 250 ft.250 ft. 250 ft.250 ft.
125
350
600
300
500
250
450
225
400
200
175
150
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(PS
I)P
UM
PD
ISC
HA
RG
EP
RE
SS
UR
E(P
SI)
3/4" HOSE 1" HOSE 1 1/2" HOSE
100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI100 PSI75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI
10
16
20
23
26
29
34
38
42
46
49
55
—
13
17
20
22
25
29
33
36
39
42
48
—
11
15
18
20
22
26
29
32
34
37
42
23
34
42
50
56
62
72
80
90
98
105
120
20
29
36
42
48
52
62
70
78
84
90
100
18
26
32
38
42
46
54
62
68
74
80
90
70 60 50
100
125
85
110
125
75
95
110
125
— ———
— ——— —
— ——— — —
— ——— — —
— ——— — —
— ——— — —
— ——— — —
— ——— — —
— ——— — —
22
25
27
30
32
34
38
42
45
52
57
49
19
21
24
26
28
30
33
37
39
42
45
50
17
19
21
23
25
27
30
33
35
38
40
44
53
61
68
75
82
88
99
109
117
—
—
—
47
54
60
66
71
77
86
95
103
110
117
—
42
49
55
60
65
69
78
85
93
99
106
117
108
125
89
106
118—
97
114
—
(1) Number in each box indicates flow (GPM). (2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose.
(3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
(1) Number in each box indicates flow (GPM). (2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose.
(3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
FLOW (GPM)
75 PSI100 PSI
= 7 BAR ULTIMATIC= 7 BAR ULTIMATIC ULTIMATIC 125 Flow ChartULTIMATIC 125 Flow Chart
45M 45M. 45M60M 60M 60M75M 75M 75M
8.6
24
41
21
34
17
31
15.5
28
14
12
10
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
19mm HOSE 25mm HOSE 38mm HOSE
7 BAR 7 BAR6 BAR
(1) Number in each box indicates flow (LPM). (2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose.
(3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping. (4) 1 BAR = 100 KPA
(1) Number in each box indicates flow (LPM). (2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose.
(3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping. (4) 1 BAR = 100 KPA
FLOW (LPM)
= 6 BAR ULTIMATIC= 6 BAR ULTIMATIC6 BAR7 BAR
40
60
75
85
100
110
130
145
160
175
185
210
85
95
100
115
120
130
145
160
170
185
195
215
----
50
65
75
85
95
110
125
135
150
160
180
70
80
90
100
105
115
125
140
150
160
170
190
----
40
55
70
75
85
100
110
120
130
140
160
65
70
80
85
95
100
115
125
130
145
150
165
7 BAR 6 BAR6 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR
75
110
135
160
180
195
235
265
295
320
340
380
180
205
225
250
270
290
325
360
390
415
445
----
85
130
160
190
210
235
275
305
340
370
395
455
200
230
255
285
310
335
375
415
445
----
----
----
70
100
120
145
160
175
205
235
255
280
305
340
160
185
210
225
245
260
295
320
350
375
400
445
265
380
475
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
410
475
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
225
320
415
475
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
365
430
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
190
285
360
415
475
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
335
400
445
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
9
9.0 NOZZLE FLOW CHARTS
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
154
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (GPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (LBS).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (GPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (LBS).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
150 ft.150 ft. 150 ft.150 ft. 150 ft.150 ft.200 ft.200 ft. 200 ft.200 ft. 200 ft.200 ft.250 ft.250 ft. 250 ft.250 ft. 250 ft.250 ft.
50
225
200
175
150
125
100
75
21
31
65
93
117
140
162
183
8
13
30
45
59
72
84
94
49
61
86
115
141
165
187
208
16
24
37
51
63
73
81
88
21
29
59
84
105
124
141
158
7
12
27
40
52
63
73
82
48
59
77
101
123
142
160
176
15
23
33
44
55
63
71
78
21
28
55
77
96
112
128
142
7
12
25
37
47
57
65
73
46
57
71
92
110
128
143
157
14
21
30
40
49
57
64
70
21
23
72
108
141
174
204
---
8
14
34
54
72
90
105
---
51
65
102
142
178
214
---
---
17
27
45
63
79
90
---
---
21
32
67
97
125
151
175
198
8
14
32
48
63
78
91
102
50
62
91
124
153
179
204
222
16
25
40
55
68
79
87
95
21
31
63
91
114
136
157
176
7
13
29
44
57
70
81
91
49
60
84
111
137
159
179
198
16
24
36
49
61
70
79
86
22
36
84
135
196
---
---
---
8
15
41
69
101
---
---
---
52
69
137
216
---
---
---
---
18
29
61
91
---
---
---
---
22
35
79
122
168
212
---
---
8
15
38
62
87
109
---
---
52
68
120
175
221
---
---
---
18
28
35
77
95
---
---
---
22
34
75
113
151
187
222
---
8
15
36
57
78
97
113
---
51
66
108
155
195
224
---
---
17
27
48
69
85
98
---
---
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(PS
I)P
UM
PD
ISC
HA
RG
EP
RE
SS
UR
E(P
SI)
1 1/2" HOSE 1 3/4" HOSE 2" HOSE
100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI100 PSI75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI
FLOW (GPM)
REACTION
(LBS)
= 100 PSI MID-MATIC= 100 PSI MID-MATIC 75 PSI100 PSI = 75 PSI MID-MATIC= 75 PSI MID-MATIC
250 202104
22196
17490
19879
15580
17969
------
------
------
------
------
------
218112
------
194100
21591
------
------
Flow & Nozzle Reaction ChartFlow & Nozzle Reaction ChartMID-MATIC
Flow & Nozzle Reaction ChartFlow & Nozzle Reaction ChartMID-MATIC
7 BAR 7 BAR7 BAR7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (LPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (KG).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (LPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (KG).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
45M 45M 45M60M 60M 60M75M 75M 75M
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
38mm HOSE 45mm HOSE 50mm HOSE
7 BAR
FLOW (LPM)
REACTION
(KG)
3.5
5.2
7
8.6
10
12
14
15.5
17
3.5
5.2
7
8.6
10
12
14
15.5
17
= 6 BAR MID-MATIC= 6 BAR MID-MATIC6 BAR7 BAR = 7 BAR MID-MATIC= 7 BAR MID-MATIC
80
115
245
350
445
530
615
695
765
4
6
14
20
27
33
38
43
47
210
350
460
540
615
680
740
790
835
8
14
19
24
28
31
35
40
44
80
110
225
320
395
470
535
600
660
3
5
12
18
24
29
33
37
41
190
315
405
475
540
600
655
705
750
7
12
16
20
24
27
30
33
36
80
105
210
290
365
425
485
535
585
175
285
365
430
490
540
590
635
680
3
5
11
17
21
26
30
33
36
6
11
15
18
21
24
26
29
31
80
85
275
410
535
660
770
----
----
245
420
540
650
740
805
----
----
----
4
6
15
25
33
41
48
----
----
10
17
24
30
35
41
----
----
----
80
120
255
365
475
570
660
750
825
225
380
490
575
660
725
785
835
----
4
6
15
22
29
35
41
46
51
9
15
20
25
30
35
39
44
----
80
115
240
345
430
515
595
665
735
205
345
445
520
600
660
715
770
815
3
6
13
20
26
32
37
41
45
8
14
18
23
26
30
34
38
41
85
135
320
510
740
----
----
----
----
310
535
695
805
----
----
----
----
----
4
7
19
31
46
----
----
----
----
12
23
33
41
----
----
----
----
----
85
130
300
460
635
800
----
----
----
285
485
630
750
----
----
----
----
----
4
7
17
28
40
50
----
----
----
11
20
29
36
43
----
----
----
----
85
130
285
430
570
710
840
----
----
255
450
580
690
775
845
----
----
----
4
7
16
26
35
44
51
----
----
10
19
25
32
38
45
----
----
----
10LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
155
11
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (GPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (LBS).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (GPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (LBS).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
150 ft. 150 ft. 150 ft.200 ft. 200 ft. 200 ft.250 ft. 250 ft. 250 ft.
50
225
200
175
150
125
100
75
1 1/2" HOSE 1 3/4" HOSE 2" HOSE
100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI100 PSI75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI75 PSI
FLOW
(GPM)
REACTION
(LBS)
= 100 PSI HANDLINE 75 PSI100 PSI = 75 PSI HANDLINE
250
150 ft. 200 ft. 250 ft.
2-1/2" HOSE
100 PSI 100 PSI100 PSI 75 PSI 75 PSI75 PSI
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(PS
I)P
UM
PD
ISC
HA
RG
EP
RE
SS
UR
E(P
SI)
48
64
96
122
145
165
183
200
216
16
25
39
52
63
72
81
89
97
71
104
130
151
170
187
202
216
229
20
31
41
49
57
65
72
80
88
47
60
85
108
127
144
160
174
188
15
23
34
45
54
62
70
77
83
65
91
114
133
149
164
178
190
202
18
27
35
42
48
55
61
66
72
45
58
77
98
115
130
144
157
169
14
22
31
40
48
56
62
68
74
60
82
103
120
135
148
160
172
182
16
24
31
37
43
48
53
58
63
50
73
115
149
177
203
227
249
269
17
29
48
64
78
91
102
113
123
84
126
157
183
206
225
241
257
271
25
39
52
63
74
86
98
109
122
49
67
103
131
156
178
198
216
234
16
26
42
56
68
79
88
97
106
75
112
136
162
182
201
217
231
244
22
34
44
54
63
71
80
90
99
48
63
93
119
141
160
178
195
210
15
25
38
50
61
70
79
87
94
70
101
126
147
165
182
197
211
223
20
30
39
48
55
63
70
77
85
51
88
148
197
239
276
295
312
329
18
36
64
88
108
127
145
163
181
107
162
203
232
256
276
295
313
336
33
54
72
90
108
127
145
163
180
51
81
132
173
210
242
270
289
304
29
47
63
77
92
108
123
138
154
17
33
57
76
94
109
123
138
154
96
145
182
212
234
255
272
288
304
50
76
121
158
189
217
243
266
284
17
31
51
69
84
98
110
121
133
88
133
166
194
218
236
254
269
284
26
42
56
68
81
94
107
120
134
53
123
252
300
343
356
369
—
---
19
52
114
150
185
210
235
—
---
157
230
269
300
341
355
368
—
---
52
89
120
150
185
209
234
—
---
53
116
224
290
317
349
362
375
---
19
49
101
140
167
198
222
245
---
148
221
260
290
335
348
361
373
---
48
83
112
140
173
197
221
245
---
53
111
206
282
307
343
356
368
380
18
46
92
131
157
186
210
232
255
140
212
251
281
307
342
354
367
378
45
77
105
131
157
186
209
232
255
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (LPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (KG).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
(1) Number on top in each box indicates flow (LPM), and number on bottom indicates nozzle reaction (KG).
(2) Flows may vary with brand or condition of hose. (3) Flows are approximate and do not reflect losses in preconnect piping.
45M 45M 45M60M 60M 60M75M 75M 75M
3.5
15.5
14
12
10
8.6
7
5.2
38mm HOSE 45mm HOSE 50mm HOSE
7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR 7 BAR7 BAR7 BAR6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR6 BAR6 BAR6 BAR6 BAR
FLOW
(GPM)
REACTION
(LBS)
= 7 BAR HANDLINE 6 BAR7 BAR = 6 BAR HANDLINE
17
45M 60M 75M
65mm HOSE
7 BAR 7 BAR7 BAR 6 BAR 6 BAR6 BAR
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
PU
MP
DIS
CH
AR
GE
PR
ES
SU
RE
(BA
R)
182
242
363
462
549
625
693
757
818
7
11
18
24
29
33
37
40
44
269
394
492
572
643
708
765
818
867
9
14
19
22
26
29
33
36
40
178
227
322
409
481
545
606
659
712
7
10
15
20
24
28
32
35
38
246
344
431
503
564
621
674
719
765
8
12
16
19
22
25
28
30
33
170
220
291
371
435
492
545
594
640
6
10
14
18
22
25
28
31
34
227
310
390
454
511
560
606
651
689
7
11
14
17
20
22
24
26
29
189
276
435
564
670
768
859
942
1018
8
13
22
29
35
41
46
51
56
318
477
594
693
780
852
912
973
1026
11
18
24
29
34
39
44
49
55
185
254
390
496
590
674
749
818
866
7
12
19
25
31
36
40
44
48
284
424
526
613
689
761
821
874
924
10
15
20
24
29
32
36
41
45
182
238
352
450
534
606
674
738
795
7
11
17
23
28
32
36
39
43
265
382
477
556
625
689
746
799
844
9
14
18
22
25
29
32
35
39
193
333
560
746
905
1045
1117
1181
1245
8
16
29
40
49
58
66
74
82
405
613
768
878
969
1045
1117
1185
1272
15
24
33
41
49
58
66
74
82
193
307
500
655
795
916
1022
1094
1151
13
21
29
35
42
49
56
63
70
8
15
26
34
43
49
56
63
70
363
549
689
802
866
965
1030
1090
1151
189
588
458
598
715
821
920
1007
1075
8
14
23
31
38
44
50
55
60
333
503
628
734
825
893
961
1018
1075
12
19
25
31
37
43
49
54
61
201
466
954
1136
1298
1347
1397
—
---
9
24
52
68
84
95
107
—
---
594
871
1018
1136
1291
1344
1393
—
---
24
40
54
68
84
95
106
—
---
201
439
848
1098
1200
1321
1370
1419
---
9
22
46
64
76
90
101
111
---
560
836
984
1098
1268
1317
1366
1412
---
22
38
51
64
78
89
100
111
---
201
420
780
1067
1162
1298
1347
1393
1438
8
21
42
59
71
84
95
105
116
530
802
950
1064
1162
1294
1340
1389
1431
20
35
48
59
71
84
95
105
116
Note: For Nozzles with Serial # TFT-H465101
and/or Manufactured after 12/01/2003
HANDLINE Flow & Nozzle Reaction Chart
HANDLINE Flow & Nozzle Reaction ChartNote: For Nozzles with Serial # TFT-H465101
and/or Manufactured after 12/01/2003
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
156
Nozzle must be inspected for proper operation and function according to this checklist before each use.
Check that:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
There is no obvious damage such as missing, broken or loose parts, damaged labels etc.
Gasket grabber is free of debris.
Coupling is tight and leak free.
Valve operates freely through full range and regulates flow.
"OFF" position does fully shut off and flow is stopped.
Nozzle flow is adequate as indicated by pump pressure and nozzle reaction.
Shaper turns freely and adjusts pattern through full range.
Shaper turns into full flush and out of flush with normal flow and pressure restored.
10.0 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Any Ultimatic, Mid-Matic or Handline nozzle failing any part of the
inspection checklist is unsafe and must have the problem corrected
before use. Operating a nozzle that fails any of the above inspections is a
misuse of this equipment.
WARNING
LIN-030 October 5, 2004 Rev06©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2004
2800 E Evans Ave • Valparaiso , IN 46383-6940 USA
800-348-2686 • 219-462-6161 • Fax 219-464-7155Made in USA • www.tft.comTASK FORCE TIPS, Inc.
157
MANUAL FOR SAFE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Read instruction manual before use. Operation of this device without understanding the manual
and receiving proper training is a misuse of this equipment. Users who have not read and
understood all operating and safety instructions are not qualified to operate this eductor.
This manual should be
kept available to all operating and maintenance personnel.
This
instruction manual is intended to familiarize firefighters and maintenance personnel with the
operation, servicing, and safety procedures associated with the eductor.
MANUAL: IN-LINE
FOAM EDUCTOR
WARNING
Concentration Settings
Off, 1/4%, 1/2%, 1%, 3%, 6%
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01
Inlet Pressure:
200 PSI (13.8 Bar)
Maximum
Back Pressure:
130 PSI (8.9 Bar)
95Read manual before use.
WARNING
MODELUE-095
GPMEductor
® 800-348-2686
www.tft.comUL211
Inlet 200 psi (14 bar)
Consult Manual for Hoselay
and Nozzle Selection.
UL201
95GPMEductor
Models: 125 GPM (475 l/min)
95 GPM (360 l/min)
60 GPM (227 l/min)
2800 E Evans Ave • Valparaiso , IN 46383-6940 USA
800-348-2686 • 219-462-6161 • Fax 219-464-7155Made in USA • www.tft.comTASK FORCE TIPS, Inc.
158
1.0 MEANING OF SIGNAL WORDS
2.0 SAFETY
3.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
4.0 FOAM SELECTION
5.0 MAXIMUM HOSE LAY
6.0 NOZZLE SELECTION
7.0 TROUBLE-SHOOTING
8.0 WARRANTY
9.0 DRAWING AND PARTS LIST
10.0 FOAM BUCKET ARRANGEMENT
11.0 MAINTENANCE
3.1 PART IDENTIFICATION
3.2 GENERAL OPERATING
INSTRUCTION
3.3 CLEANING EDUCTOR
4.1 CLASS A FOAM
4.2 CLASS B FOAM
4.3 FOAM COMPATIBILITY
4.4 FOAM CONSUMPTION
10.1 FOAM SUPPLY LOGISITICS
1.0 MEANING OF SIGNAL WORDS
A safety related message is identified by a safety alert symbol and a signal word to indicate the level of risk involved with a
particular hazard. Per ANSI standard Z535.4-1998 the definitions of the three signal words are as follows:
DANGER
CAUTION
WARNING
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.0 SAFETY
The eductor is designed for Class A and Class B foam concentrates. If you intend to use the eductor for liquids other than Class A and
Class B concentrates and water, we urge you to contact the Task Force Tips Engineering Department. The use of other liquids may void
the warranty and subject the user to hazards not addressed in this manual. The user assumes all risks for non-intended uses.
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure there is enough foam concentrate prepared before fighting fire. TFT’s eductors are calibrated 15% more than
the nominal rate, or half percent point, which ever is less. Per FOAM EQUIPMENT AND LIQUID CONCENTRATES – UL
162, the liquid concentrate induction rate of a proportioner, expressed as a percentage of the flow rate of the mixed water
plus concentrate solution, shall be minus zero (0) percent, plus thirty (30) percent of the manufacturer’s specified
induction rate or one percent point, whichever is less.
Make sure the meter head set to OFF position and the correct nozzle and hose lay are securely attached to the eductor
before the hose line is charged.
Make sure the nozzle gallonage matches eductor’s gallonage.
Make sure the hose lay does not exceed the maximum listed in the operating instruction.
Make sure that the meter head is set to the correct concentration for the type of foam being used. Foam concentrates can
be ineffective if not used at the correct percentage.
Lack of foam can place operator at risk of injury or death. Establish foam flow before advancing into
hazardous situations. Make sure you do not run out of foam concentrate before the task is
complete. Check concentrate level periodically and keep an adequate supply on hand.DANGER
2
Do not use Class A foam on Class B fires or Class B foam on Class A fires. Note: Some foam
concentrates are universal and can be used on Class B fires and spills and as a wetting agent on
Class A fires. (Refer to foam concentrate manufacturer’s recommendations for proper foam
choice.)
WARNING
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01159
3.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
Eductor Types:
INLINE EDUCTOR 60 GPM 1.5"NH INLINE EDUCTOR 60 GPM 1.5"NPSH
INLINE EDUCTOR 95 GPM 1.5"NH INLINE EDUCTOR 95 GPM 1.5"NPSH
INLINE EDUCTOR 125 GPM 1.5"NH INLINE EDUCTOR 125 GPM 1.5"NPSH
UE-060-NF UE-060-IF
UE-095-NF UE-095-IF
UE-125-NF UE-125-IF
UE-060-NJ UE-060-IJ
UE-095-NJ UE-095-IJ
UE-125-NJ UE-125-IJ
INLINE EDUCTOR 60 GPM 2.5"NH INLINE EDUCTOR 60 GPM 2.5"NPSH
INLINE EDUCTOR 95 GPM 2.5"NH INLINE EDUCTOR 95 GPM 2.5"NPSH
INLINE EDUCTOR 125 GPM 2.5"NH INLINE EDUCTOR 125 GPM 2.5"NPSH
The eductor proportioning rate ranges from 0 .25%,0 .5%, 1%, 3%, to 6%.
TFT’s eductors can be used with 0.25% or 0.5% class A foam concentrates for wildland, rural and urban fire suppression on Class A
fuels (wood, paper, combustible materials). On Class A materials the eductors are intended to be used for direct extinguishment,
overhaul, and wetting of fuels. Some foam concentrates are corrosive, we recommend using only Class A concentrates that have
received USDA and USFS approval.
On class B materials, the eductors are primarily intended for vapor suppression or extinguishment. They can be used with high
viscosity 1%, 3%, 6%, 3x3% and 3x6% Alcohol Resistant Class B concentrates on flammable liquids containing polar solvents.
The eductor can also be used with plain AFFF concentrates rated at 1%, 3%, or 6%, with various freeze protected foams, and with FFFP
foam types. These foams generally have a lower viscosity than the calibration viscosity of the TFT eductor and will be inducted faster
than expected resulting in stronger concentrations. While this does not degrade foam quality, it does reduce the operating time for a
given foam supply.
Standard inlet operating pressure is 200 psi on all eductors (1400 kPa/14 bar).
3.1 PART IDENTIFICATION
PROPORTIONING INDICATOR
36" LONG 1" ID CLEAR HOSE
(Not to Scale)
20" LONG 1" OD WAND
(Not to Scale)
Improper use of foam can result in injury or damage to the environment. Follow the foam
concentrate manufacturer's instructions and fire service training to avoid the following:
• Using the wrong type of foam on a fire, i.e. Class A foam on Class B flammable liquid fire
• Mishandling of concentrates
• Plunging foam into pools of liquid fuels
• Directing foam onto yourself or other personnel
There is a wide variety of foam concentrates. Each user is responsible for verifying that any foam
concentrate chosen to be used with this unit has been tested to assure that the foam obtained is
suitable for the purpose intended.
WARNING
WARNING
EDUCTOR BODY EXIT
METERING HEAD
RETRACT THE LOCKER RING
TO UNLOCK.
RELEASE THE LOCKER RING
TO ENGAGE.
TURN KNOB TO SET
PROPORTIONING RATE.
PUSH BUTTON TO
BACK FLUSH.
CHECK DISK
3©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01160
3.2 GENERAL OPERATING INSTRUCTION
4.0 FOAM SELECTION
Actual foam concentrations vary with changes in water flow, foam concentrate temperature and viscosity. The user must verify that the
concentrate’s performance is suitable for use in their application. In all cases, the manufacturer’s recommendations must be followed.
1) Choose the right foam concentrate (see section 4)
2) Lay the right hose (see section 5)
3) Connect the right nozzle (see section 6)
4) Charge the hose and open the nozzle fully to establish the water flow.
5) Adjust the pump pressure so the eductor inlet is set at 200 PSI.
6) Put the wand in the bucket and rotate the percentage knob to the desired concentration.
Class A foam concentrates are generally less viscous than Class B foam concentrates. Using 1%
Class B foam percentage setting to educt Class A foam, may cause the actual Class A foam
percentage to be more than 1%.CAUTION
4.1 CLASS A FOAM
Apply as needed for penetration, isolation,
cooling, and smothering.
SOLID FUEL - CLASS ACLASS A FOAM
Recommended using Class A foam that meets USDA Forest Service “Interim Requirements for Foam for Wildland Fires,
Aircraft or Ground Application” or NFPA 298 “Foam Chemicals for Wildland Fire Control.”
Apply with low expansion nozzle for: straight stream nozzle
- soaking and penetration of fuel low expansion nozzle
- greater stream reach piercing nozzle
Apply with medium expansion nozzle for: medium expansion nozzle
- greater coverage
- longer lasting
- insulating
WILDLAND &
EXPOSURE PROTECTION
MOP UP & OVERHAUL
OPERATIONS
After use take the wand out of the bucket and turn down the pump pressure below 75 PSI. Shut off the nozzle. Restrain the wand and
expect a rapid discharge of water especially at 6% setting. Push the red flush button and run fresh water through the wand and
metering head on each setting until there is no visible foam in the flush water.
Retract the lock ring to remove the metering head. Turn off the water supply and remove the eductor from the hose so that any
remaining foam residue can be washed from the wand, metering head, and eductor.
3.3 CLEANING EDUCTOR
Do not back flush above 75 PSI. Rapid back flush discharge from the wand could cause injury. The
back flush push button is pressure activated and must not be forced at pressures over 75 PSI (5 bar).
The eductor can be split into two parts by grasping the locking ring and retracting it fully to separate the metering head from the eductor
body. All the foam passageways can easily be inspected. The foam passageway into the eductor contains a free-floating check disk
with three fins. The check disk is pressure activated to keep water from coming out of the fire hose and back into the foam pail.
The metering head contains a red back flush button that can be depressed to open the check disk.
The metering head also has a large proportioning knob that can be rotated to align a ball valve to six different detent positions: Off ¼%
½% 1% 3% 6%. Each foam setting has a precision sized metering orifice in the valve ball. The eductor cannot be operated between
settings, as the metering orifices will not line up properly. The setting on the proportioning knob lines up with the white indicator ball.
3.1 PART IDENTIFICATION cont.
CAUTION
4©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01161
4.2 CLASS B FOAM
LIQUID FUEL - CLASS B
Apply with
MEDIUM EXPANSION
NOZZLE
for vapor suppression
Apply with
MEDIUM EXPANSION
NOZZLE
for vapor suppression
HYDROCARBONS
Fuels that are mostly distilled from crude oil or
vegetable matter. Will not mix with water.
May apply at less than
rates for ignited. Be
capable of increasing to
ignited rates if needed.
AFFF (Aqueous Film Forming Foam)
AR (Alcohol Resistant Foam)
POLAR SOLVENTS
A flammable liquid that mixes with water. Examples
are alcohol's, amines, ethers, esters, aldehydes,
and ketones. In firefighting, any flammable liquid
which destroys regular foam is generally referred to
as a polar solvent.
UNIGNITEDUNIGNITED
Application rates:
Use foam manufacturer's
recommendations for
handheld nozzles.
AR (Alcohol Resistant Foam)
4.3 FOAM COMPATIBILITY
Medium Expansion Nozzle
Low Expansion Nozzle
Straight Stream Nozzle
— produces the greatest expansion ratios. It should be used on Class B fuels for vapor suppression
and Class A fuels when a longer lasting insulating layer of drier foam is desired.
— can be used with either Class A or B foam solutions. Reach is slightly less than the smooth bore. It
should be used on Class B fires for extinguishment and Class A fuels to soak the fuel with a wet foam solution.
— is for Class A foam solutions. Foam expansion will be negligible. It should be used where maximum
reach or penetration is desired.
Do not mix different types of foam concentrates or foams of the same type from different
manufacturers. Mixing of foam concentrates can cause the contents of the foam tank to gel and
produce unpredictable results. Clean tank and foam passages thoroughly when changing foam
types.
CAUTION
4.4 FOAM CONSUMPTION
The following tables indicate the theoretical foam concentrate flow rate and the time it will take to empty a 5 gallon container of various
concentrates with eductors of different ratings.
60 GPM Eductor
1/4% A 33 min 20 sec 0.15 gpm
1/2% A 16 min 40 sec 0.3 gpm
1% B 8 min 20 sec 0.6 gpm
3% B 2 min 47 sec 1.8 gpm
6% B 1 min 23 sec 3.6 gpm
Setting Foam Time To Empty Foam
Class 5 Gallons Flow Rate
Time To Empty Foam
5 Gallons Flow Rate
20 min 50 sec 0.24 gpm
10 min 25 sec 0.5 gpm
5 min 16 sec 1.0 gpm
1 min 45 sec 2.9 gpm
53 sec 5.7 gpm
95 GPM Eductor
Time To Empty Foam
5 Gallons Flow Rate
16 min 0.3 gpm
8 min 0.6 gpm
4 min 0 sec 1.3 gpm
1 min 20 sec 3.8 gpm
40 sec 7.5 gpm
125 GPM Eductor
5©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01162
The maximum hose lay is based on the back pressure. Pushing the foam solution thru the hose and nozzle causes back pressure
on the eductor exit. If the back pressure is over 130 PSI the eductor will not work. However, when proportioning rate is no more
than 1%, 140psi back pressure is acceptable.
Elevation loss adds to the back pressure when the nozzle is higher than the eductor. For each foot in vertical height there is 0.4 PSI
elevation loss.
Per UL-162, TFT’s eductors are calibrated 15% more than the nominal rate, or half percent point, which ever is less. Therefore actual
time to empty 5 gallons is less than the values in table.
5.0 MAXIMUM HOSE LAY
4.4 FOAM CONSUMPTION cont.
Do not exceed 130 PSI back pressure. Excess back pressure causes loss of foam flow resulting in
risk of injury or death from an ineffective stream. Verify that adequate foam flow is established and
maintained.
The following table shows the reference friction loss based on water flow, hose length and size. To calculate the back pressure, add the
nozzle pressure, hose friction loss, and elevation pressure loss together, and make sure the sum does not exceed 130 psi.
WARNING
SETTING ACTUAL RATE FOAM
1/4% 0.287% A
1/2% 0.575% A
1% 1.15% B
3% 3.45% B
6% 6.5% B
CLASS
Actual calibrated rate for each setting and the
foam concentrate used for calibration1. The class A foam used for calibration is the “Knock Down” from National
Foam. The viscosity is 20 Centipoise.
2. The class B foam used for calibration is the “Universal Plus 3% /6% Alcohol
Resistant Aqueous Film Forming Foam” (AR-AFFF) from National Foam.
The viscosity is 2892 centipoise tested with Brookfield #3
Spindle @ 30 rpm.
3. TFT’S eductors were calibrated with 1 ¾” Conquest Hose.
UE-060-NF calibration hose length is 300 ft.
UE-095-NF calibration hose length is 250 ft.
UE-125-NF calibration hose length is 150 ft.
calibration
calibration
6
TFT Inline Eductor Maximum Hose Lay and Elevation Chart
System Flow
GPM
Hose Size
Inch
3% - 6% Solution Up to 1% Solution
100 psi Nozzle 75 psi Nozzle
60
95
125
1-1/2
1-3/4
2
1-1/2
1-3/4
1-3/4
300
100
—
450
150
—
100
—
—
200
—
—
100
—
—
200
100
—
Maximum
Hose Lay Ft
10
50
—
10
50
—
10
—
—
10
—
—
10
—
—
10
50
—
Elevation
Ft
600
400
150
900
600
250
200
150
—
350
250
100
200
150
—
400
250
100
Maximum
Hose Lay Ft
10
50
100
10
50
100
10
50
—
10
50
100
10
50
—
10
50
100
Elevation
Ft
100 psi Nozzle 75 psi Nozzle
450
250
—
700
400
—
150
100
—
300
150
—
150
100
—
350
200
—
Maximum
Hose Lay Ft
10
50
—
10
50
—
10
50
—
10
50
—
10
50
—
10
50
—
Elevation
Ft
800
600
300
1200
900
500
300
200
100
450
350
200
250
200
100
550
400
250
Maximum
Hose Lay Ft
10
50
100
10
50
100
10
50
100
10
50
100
10
50
100
10
50
100
Elevation
Ft
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01163
The nozzle must be operated fully open to prevent excessive back pressure which will prevent
foam pickup. Lack of foam can result in injury or death.
The following tables list the compatibility between eductors and nozzles. NOTE: A 75 psi nozzle will result in lower nozzle pressure
and shorter stream reach.
7
6.0 NOZZLE SELECTIONEductors work with any nozzle whose gallonage is equal or larger than eductors’. However, if a larger gallonage nozzle is used, the
reach of nozzle and the proportioning rate of the eductor will be compromised.
Fog-type nozzles have the greatest reach in the straight stream position. The finished foam is produced as the stream projects forward,
and the greatest expansion is at the end of the stream. While straight stream gives maximum reach, it can also splash flammable
liquids if not carefully applied. The stream impact can be softened by deflecting the stream off nearby objects. The stream can also be
trimmed to a 10-15 degree pattern which gives good reach and creates a softer “snow-flaking” effect at the end of the stream.
The expansion ratio is the amount of finished foam produced compared to the volume of foam concentrate/water solution used to
generate the foam. For Example: A 10:1 expansion ratio will produce 950 GPM of finished foam from a 95 GPM nozzle. Non-aspirated
automatic nozzles can produce expansion ratios of 6-8:1 when measured at the end of the stream. By maintaining a constant nozzle
pressure, automatic nozzles keep the velocity of the stream high. Large amounts of air are pulled into the stream and mix with the foam
concentrate/water solution as the stream leaves the nozzle.
Air-aspirating devices, such as the TFT FOAMJET, allow a wider selection of foam concentrates to be used, and can produce a better
quality of finished foam. Air-aspirating attachments will, (1) improve the 1/4 drain time, (2) produce a more uniform bubble structure, (3)
improve the burn back resistance of the finished foam, and (4) the foam blanket is visibly thicker. This thicker foam blanket has better
vapor suppression and is longer lasting than foam from non-aspirated nozzles. The final expansion ratio and, therefore, the amount of
finished foam, depends on the type of foam concentrate being used.
Friction loss varies with different brand hoses. Please specify the friction loss of your own hose.
The nominal flow of the eductor is the sum of water plus foam concentrate when set at 6%. The eductor should always have 200 psi at
the inlet. The water flow does not change with different percentage settings, however, the inducted foam concentrate will change when
the percentage setting is changed. Therefore, the total flow exiting the eductor is lower at .25% than at 6%. Lower flow rate helps
reducing nozzle pressure and hose friction loss. Longer hose can be used when proportioning rate is less because less work is
needed to move less concentrate.
TFT Inline Eductor Maximum Hose Lay and Elevation Chart (Metric)
System Flow
l/min
Hose Size
mm
3% - 6% Solution Up to 1% Solution
230
360
475
38
45
50
38
45
45
90
30
—
140
45
—
30
—
—
60
—
—
30
—
—
60
30
—
Max Hose
Lay Meter
3
15
—
3
15
—
3
—
—
3
—
—
3
—
—
3
15
—
Elevation
Meter
185
120
45
275
185
75
60
45
—
105
75
30
60
45
—
120
75
30
3
15
30
3
15
30
3
15
—
3
15
30
3
15
—
3
15
30
7 bar Nozzle 5 bar Nozzle
140
75
—
215
120
—
45
30
—
90
45
—
45
30
—
105
60
—
3
15
—
3
15
—
3
15
—
3
15
—
3
15
—
3
15
—
245
185
90
365
275
150
90
60
30
140
105
60
75
60
30
170
120
75
3
15
30
3
15
30
3
15
30
3
15
30
3
15
30
3
15
30
7 bar Nozzle 5 bar Nozzle
Max Hose
Lay Meter
Max Hose
Lay Meter
Max Hose
Lay Meter
Elevation
Meter
Elevation
Meter
Elevation
Meter
WARNING
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01164
Twister F2060, 60 100 NONE FJ-MX-F
Bubble Cup F2060BC, 60 100 BUILT IN NONE
Thunderfog FT200*, 60 100 or 75 NONE FJ-MX-FT
Ultimatic B* 10-125 or 10-100 100 or 75 FJ-U FJ-UMX
Quadrafog FQ125**, 60 100 or 75 FJ-LX-FQ FJ-MX-FQ
Nozzle Nozzle Water Flow Nozzle Low Expansion Multi-Expansion
Name model # Setting GPM Pressure psi Foam Attachment Foam Attachment
FS2060, FS2060P
FS2060BC
FS2060BCP
FTS200*
FQS125**
UE-060 EDUCTOR 60 GPM
UE-095 EDUCTOR 95 GPM
Twister F2095, 95 100 NONE FJ-MX-F
Bubble Cup F2095BC, 95 100 BUILT IN NONE
Quadrafog FQ125**, 95 100 or 75 FJ-LX-FQ FJ-MX-FQ
Thunderfog FT200*, 95 NONE FJ-MX-FT
Ultimatic B* 10-125 or 10-100 100 or 75 FJ-U FJ-UMX
Mid-Matic HM-** 70-200 100 FJ-LX-HM FJ-MX-HM
HML-* 70-200 75
Mid-Force HMD-** 70-200 100
HMDL-* 70-200 75
Handline H-** 95-300 100 FJ-H FJ-HMX
HL-** 95-250 75
Dual-Force HD-** 95-300 100 FJ-H FJ-HMX
HDL-** 95-250 75
Nozzle Nozzle Water Flow Nozzle Low Expansion Multi-Expansion
Name Model# Setting GPM Pressure PSI Foam Attachment Foam Attachment
FS2095, FS2095P
F95BC, FS2095BC
FS95BC, FS2095BCP, FS95BCP
FQS125**
Metro 1 ME1* 95 100 FJ-LX-HM FJ-MX-HM
FTS200*, FT250* 100 or 75
FTS250*, JT250*, JTS250*
FJ-LX-HM FJ-MX-HM
MAX-FORCE MDF12A, MDJ12A 100-500 100 NONE NONE
MAX-MATIC MDF18A, MDJ18A 100-500 100
MDF17A, 100-500 80
Quadrafog FQ125**, 125 100 or 75 FJ-LX-FQ FJ-MX-FQ
ThunderFog FT200*, 125 100 or 75 NONE FJ-MX-FT
Mid-Matic HM-** 70-200 100 FJ-LX-HM FJ-MX-HM
Mid-Force HMD-** 70-200 100
Handline H-** 95-300 100 FJ-H FJ-HMX
HL-** 95-250 75
Dual-Force HD-** 95-300 100 FJ-H FJ-HMX
HDL-** 95-250 75
Nozzle Nozzle Water Flow Nozzle Low Expansion Multi-Expansion
Name Model# Setting GPM Pressure PSI Foam Attachment Foam Attachment
MDJ17A
FQS125**
Metro 1 ME1* 125 100 FJ-LX-HM FJ-MX-HM
Metro 2 ME2* 125 75 FJ-H FJ-HMX
FTS200*, FT250*
FTS250*, JT250*, JTS250*
HML-** 70-200 75
FJ-LX-HM FJ-MX-HM
HMDL-** 70-200 75
UE-125 EDUCTOR 125 GPM
8
6.0 NOZZLE SELECTION cont.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01165
9
REMEDY
Select desired percentage
Set the eductor inlet pressure to 200 psi
Use correct metering head
Refill Tank
Select desired percentage
Take off the meter head, clean out debris in the
percentage ball
Change the hose to correct length and diameter per
5.0
Set eductor inlet pressure at 200 psi (13.8 bar)
Straighten the kinked hose
Clean out the plugged pick up tube
Fully open the valve on the nozzle
Select a nozzle with equal or larger gallonage than
eductor’s
Flush nozzle to clean out debris. If it didn’t work,
retreat, take off the nozzle and clean out the gasket
grabber.
Select Another Foam
7.0 TROUBLE-SHOOTING
SYMPTOM
Eductor picks up too
much foam
Weak Foam or
No Foam
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Percentage Knob is set at higher percentage
Eductor inlet pressure is lower than 200 psi
Wrong metering head
Out of foam or nearly empty
Percentage knob is OFF or in wrong percentage
Percentage ball is plugged or partially plugged
Hose being used which is too long or too small in
diameter
Pump pressure is too low or too high
Hose kinks
Pick up tube plugged or partially plugged
Nozzle is not fully open
Nozzle size is smaller than eductor’s rating
Debris in nozzle
Foam gets thick when cold
8.0 WARRANTY
Task Force Tips, Inc., 2800 East Evans Avenue, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383-6940 USA (“TFT”) warrants to the original purchaser of its
nozzles and other equipment (“equipment”), and to anyone to whom it is transferred, that the equipment shall be free from defects in
material and workmanship during the five (5) year period from the date of purchase.
TFT’s obligation under this warranty is specifically limited to replacing or repairing the equipment (or its parts) which are shown by
TFT’s examination to be in a defective condition attributable to TFT. To qualify for this limited warranty, the claimant must return the
equipment to TFT, at 2800 East Evans Avenue, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383-6940 USA, within a reasonable time after discovery of the
defect. TFT will examine the equipment. If TFT determines that there is a defect attributable to it, it will correct the problem within a
reasonable time. If the equipment is covered by this limited warranty, TFT will assume the expenses of repair.
If any defect attributable to TFT under this limited warranty cannot be reasonably cured by repair or replacement, TFT may elect to
refund the purchase price of the equipment, less reasonable depreciation, in complete discharge of its obligations under this limited
warranty. If TFT makes this election, claimant shall return the equipment to TFT free and clear of any liens and encumbrances.
This is a limited warranty. The original purchaser of the equipment, any person to whom it is transferred, and any person who is an
intended or unintended beneficiary of the equipment, shall not be entitled to recover from TFT any consequential or incidental
damages for injury to person and/or property resulting from any defective equipment manufactured or assembled by TFT. It is agreed
and understood that the price stated for the equipment is in part consideration for limiting TFT’s liability. Some states or countries do
not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above may not apply to you.
TFT shall have no obligation under this limited warranty if the equipment is, or has been, misused or neglected (including failure to
provide reasonable maintenance) or if there have been accidents to the equipment or if it has been repaired or altered by someone
else.
THIS IS A LIMITED EXPRESS WARRANTY ONLY. TFT EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE IS NO
WARRANTY OF ANY NATURE MADE BY TFT BEYOND THAT STATED IN THE DOCUMENT.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01166
9.0 DRAWING & PARTS LIST
10-24 X 1/2 SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
PALM BUTTON - RED ANODIZE
RETAINING RING 11/16" EXTERNAL
BUTTON SPRING
PROPORTIONING KNOB
SPRING HELICAL COMPRESSION
3/16" BALL - TORLON
O-RING-008 3/16 ID 1/16 C/S
BACK FLUSH PIN
O-RING-115 11/16 ID 3/32 C/S
BALL 60 GPM - NO GROOVES
BALL 95 GPM - 1 GROOVE
BALL 125 GPM - 2 GROOVES
7/64 X 5/8 HDP SPIROL PIN
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY. PART NO.
1 1 VT10-24SH500
2 1 UE250
3 1 VR4285
4 1 UE205
5 1 UE240
6 3 VM4195
7 3 V2120-TORLON
8 1 VO-008
9 1 UE220
10 1 VO-115
11 1 UE230
1 UE231
1 UE232
12 1 VP109X625H
10©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01167
9.0 DRAWING & PARTS LIST
METER LABEL 60GPM - EDUCTOR
METER LABEL 95GPM - EDUCTOR
METER LABEL 125GPM - EDUCTOR
METER HEAD
BALL 3/8" - POLYETHYLENE
SEAT: PROPORTIONING BALL
O-RING-117 13/16 ID 3/32 C/S
BARB FITTING
HOSE CLAMP
SUCTION HOSE 1"ID 1.25"OD CLEAR
SUCTION WAND
SPRING - LOCKER RING
O-RING-219 1-5/16 ID 1/8 C/S
LOCATION RING
1/4" BALL - 302 STAINLESS STEEL
LOCKER
CHECK DISK
NAME LABEL - 60GPM EDUCTOR
NAME LABEL - 95GPM EDUCTOR
NAME LABEL - 125GPM EDUCTOR
EXIT 60 GPM 1.5"NPSH - NO GROOVES
EXIT 60 GPM 1.5"NH - NO GROOVES
EXIT 95 GPM 1.5"NPSH - 1 GROOVE
EXIT 95 GPM 1.5"NH - 1 GROOVE
EXIT 125 GPM 1.5"NPSH - 2 GROOVES
EXIT 125 GPM 1.5"NH - 2 GROOVES
INTERSECTION
O-RING-216 1-1/8 ID 1/8 C/S
BLENDING TUBE 60GPM - NO GROOVES
BLENDING TUBE 95GPM - 1 GROOVE
BLENDING TUBE 125GPM - 2 GROOVES
3/16" BALL - 302 STAINLESS STEEL 34
O-RING-134 1-7/8 ID 3/32 C/S
35 1/4-28 X 3/16 SOCKET SET SCREW 1 VT25-28SS187
COUPLING 1.5"NPSH
COUPLING 1.5"NH
GASKET - 1.5" HOSE COUPLING
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY. PART NO.
13 1 UL200
1 UL201
1 UL202
14 1 UE235
15 1 VB375PE
16 1 UE335
17 1 VO-117
18 1 UE310
19 2 UE340
20 1 UE320
21 1 UE330
22 1 UE215
23 1 VO-219
24 1 UE245
25 6 V2125
26 1 UE210
27 1 UE225
28 2 UL210
2 UL211
2 UL212
29 1 UE100IF
1 UE100NF
1 UE101IF
1 UE101NF
1 UE102IF
1 UE102NF
30 1 UE120
31 1 VO-216
32 1 UE110
1 UE111
1 UE112
33 V2120
34 1 VO-134
36 1 HM697I
1 HM697N
37 1 V3130
38 COUPLING 2.5" NH ROCKERLUG 1 HM677N
COUPLING 2.5" NPSH ROCKER LUG 1 HM677I
39 GASKET - 2.5" HOSE COUPLING 1 V3190
Parts 11, 29, and 32 are flow calibrated as indicated by the number of grooves.
Do not intermix metering heads with eductor bodies of different flow rates. Intermixing can cause
weaker or stronger foam than expected resulting in risk of injury as the ability to control the fire is
compromised.
CAUTION
11©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01168
11.0 MAINTENANCE
Eductor does not need regular maintenance. However, make sure the eductor is fully cleaned after each usage. Otherwise, the foam
concentrate may dry inside and around the percentage ball resulting in plugged metering orifices. Look down inside metering head
and check valve to insure clean passageways.
10.0 FOAM BUCKET ARRANGEMENT
The foam suction hose is matched to the eductor and must not be lengthened or foam flow will be reduced resulting in weak foam. (as
shown in location D). The other three locations (A, B, & C) show the recommended foam bucket arrangement.
10.1 FOAM SUPPLY LOGISTICS
When using class B foams for extinguishing burning pools of liquids a continuous foam supply is essential. Foam flow may be
interrupted by not changing foam buckets quickly or by switching the metering head to OFF. Foam buckets can be difficult to move or
open quickly, therefore training and planning for a continuous foam supply is recommended.
Lack of foam can place operator at risk of injury or death. Establish foam flow before advancing into
hazardous situations. Make sure you do not run out of foam concentrate before the task is
complete. Check concentrate level periodically and keep an adequate supply on hand.DANGER
CASE C
CORRECT
CASE D
INCORRECT
CASE A
CORRECT
CASE B
CORRECT
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2004 LIU-330 October 22, 2004 Rev01
2800 E Evans Ave • Valparaiso , IN 46383-6940 USA
800-348-2686 • 219-462-6161 • Fax 219-464-7155Made in USA • www.tft.comTASK FORCE TIPS, Inc.
169
TASK FORCE TIPS
USING AUTOMATIC NOZZLES WITH FOAM EDUCTORSFire departments using automatic nozzles with 1-3/4” hose often ask, “Can we use our foam eductorswith this equipment?” The answer is YES. Foam-making is simply the addition of the proper amount offoam concentrate to water. This solution is then mixed with air (aeration) either at the nozzle withair-aspirating devices, or as the foam solution shoots through the air and makes foam for non-aspiratingnozzles. The finished foam is applied to a flammable liquid for extinguishment or to suppress vapors andprevent ignition.
By-pass or in-line eductors are pre-engineered systems that require specific inlet pressures for operation,usually 200 PSI. A large amount of that inlet pressure is lost in creating the vacuum necessary to pullfoam concentrate into the water. The pressure at the exit of the eductor is called back pressure. If theback pressure is more than 65-70% of the inlet pressure, then the eductor stops producing a vacuum,and foam cannot be made. The actual back pressure at the eductor is the combination of nozzle pressureplus friction loss in the hose and elevation loss.
Let’s look at a typical eductor set-up with old nozzles and 1-1/2” hose:
TASK FORCE TIPSTechnical Bulletin
LTT-102 July 1, 1997 Rev 1
2800 EAST EVANS AVENUE, VALPARAISO, IN 46383-6940(800)348-2686 (219)462-6161 FAX (219) 464-7155
TASK FORCE TIPS, INC.http://www.tft.com
It is well known that 1-3/4" hose has considerably less friction loss than 1-1/2" hose for a given flow. Thiscan be useful in two situations. The lower friction loss of 1-3/4" hose can help when pumping uphill. Inthis case, the larger hose would allow pumping up almost 30 ft. of rise and still be within the capabilityof the eductor. The lower friction loss can also be used to gain extra distance between the incident andthe pumper. The hose length can be increased and still be below the maximum allowable back pressureof the eductor. Lengths of up to 300 ft. of 1-3/4” hose can be operated with some eductors with greatresults.
THE LAYOUT WORKS since the actual back pressure of 130 PSI is less than the maximum allowableback pressure of 140 PSI. Foam will be made.
Now, let’s look at an AUTOMATIC NOZZLE on 1-3/4” hose:
THE LAYOUT WORKS since the actual back pressure of 118 PSI is less than the maximum allowableback pressure of 140 PSI. Foam will be made. The automatic nozzle maintains the correct 100 PSInozzle pressure, so foam can be made.
Flow Rating of Eductor 95 GPMInlet Pressure to Eductor 200 PSIMaximum Back Pressure on Eductor 140 PSI
Nozzle Pressure, fixed 95 GPM nozzle 100 PSIFriction Loss from 150 ft. of 1-1/2" hose 30 PSIElevation Loss / Gain (zero for level ground) 0 PSIActual Back Pressure Total 130 PSI
Flow Rating of Eductor 95 GPMInlet Pressure to Eductor 200 PSIMaximum Back Pressure on Eductor 140 PSI
Nozzle Pressure, automatic nozzle 100 PSIFriction Loss from 150 ft. of 1-3/4" hose 18 PSIElevation Loss / Gain (zero for level ground) 0 PSIActual Back Pressure Total 118 PSI
170
60 GPM EDUCTOR 125 EDUCTOR
Time to Empty Foam Time to Empty Foam
Mixture 5 Gallons flow rate Mixture 5 Gallons flow rate
1% setting 8 min. 20 sec. .60 GPM 1% setting 4 min. 0 sec. 1.25 GPM
3% setting 2 min. 47 sec. 1.80 GPM 3% setting 1 min. 20 sec. 3.75 GPM
6% setting 1 min. 23 sec. 3.60 GPM 6% setting 40 sec. 7.50 GPM
95 GPM EDUCTOR 250 GPM EDUCTOR
Time to Empty Foam Time to Empty Foam
Mixture 5 Gallons flow rate Mixture 5 gallons low rate
1% setting 5 min. 16 sec. .95 GPM 1% setting 2 min. 0 sec. 2.50 GPM
3% setting 1 min. 45 sec. 2.85 GPM 3% setting 40 sec. 7.50 GPM
6% setting 53 sec 5.70 GPM 6% setting 20 sec. 15.00 GPM
Fog-type nozzles have the greatest reach in the straight stream position. The finished foam is producedas the stream projects forward, and the greatest expansion is at the end of the stream. While straightstream gives maximum reach, it can also splash flammable liquids if not carefully applied. The streamimpact can be softened by deflecting the stream off nearby objects. The stream can also be trimmed to a10-15 degree pattern which gives good reach and creates a softer “snow-flaking” effect at the end of thestream.
The expansion ratio is the amount of finished foam produced compared to the volume of foamconcentrate/water solution used to generate the foam. A 10:1 expansion ratio will produce 950 GPM offinished foam from a 95 GPM nozzle. Non-aspirated automatic nozzles can produce expansion ratios of6-8:1 when measured at the end of the stream. By maintaining a constant nozzle pressure, automaticnozzles keep the velocity of the stream high. Large amounts of air are pulled into the stream and mixwith the foam concentrate/water solution as the stream leaves the nozzle.
Air-aspirating devices, such as the TFT FOAMJET, allow a wider selection of foam concentrates to beused, and can produce a better quality of finished foam. When used with AFFF, for example,air-aspirating attachments will, (1) improve the 1/4 drain time, (2) produce a more uniform bubblestructure, (3) improve the burn back resistance of the finished foam, and (4) the foam blanket is visiblythicker. This thicker foam blanket has better vapor suppression and is longer lasting than foam fromnon-aspirated nozzles. The final expansion ratio and, therefore, the amount of finished foam, depends onthe type of foam concentrate being used.
It must be remembered that when using any nozzle with an eductor, the nozzle must be fully opento prevent excessive back pressure which will prevent foam pickup.
Although originally designed for use with 1-1/2" hose and a nozzle of matching GPM, most eductors willfunction correctly with an automatic nozzle and 1-3/4" hose. By experimenting with various enginepressures on the training ground, correct operation can be assured for actual fire conditions. Automaticnozzles have an excellent performance record when used as structural fire fighting nozzles. If theseguidelines are followed, they will perform as well as foam-making nozzles.
As long as the inlet pressure to the eductor is within the manufacturer’s recommended guidelines, andthe hose lay and proper nozzle combination, at the matching flow, does not exceed 65-70% of inletpressure, foam pickup in the correct proportion will occur. The table below indicates the foamconcentrate flow rate and the time it will take to empty a 5 gallon container of various concentrates witheductors of different ratings.
LTT-102 July 97
2800 EAST EVANS AVENUE, VALPARAISO, IN 46383-6940(800)348-2686 (219)462-6161 FAX (219) 464-7155
TASK FORCE TIPS, INC.http://www.tft.com
171
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL: BLITZFIRE
MONITOR SERIES
Read instruction manual before use. Operation of this device without
understanding the manual and receiving proper training is dangerous and is a
misuse of this equipment.
Risk of sliding increases at low elevation angles. To reduce risk of injury or death
from sliding, test safety shut-off valve before using.
DANGER
DANGER
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE
175 PSI (12 BAR)
MAXIMUM FLOW
500 GPM (2000 LPM)
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 September 22, 2005 Rev05
blitzfire®
blitzfirE osc®
TASK FORCE TIPS, Inc. 2800 E. Evans Ave, Valparaiso, IN 46383-6940 USA800-348-2686 • 219-462-6161 • Fax 219-464-7155
MADE IN USA •www.tft.com 172
2
1.0 MEANING OF SIGNAL WORDS
A safety related message is identified by a safety alert symbol and a signal word to indicate the level of risk involved with aparticular hazard. Per ANSI standard Z535.4-1998 the definitions of the three signal words are as follows:
DANGER
CAUTION
WARNING
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
2.3.1
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4.0
4.1
4.2
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
11.0
Meaning of Signal Words
General Information
Blitzfire Part Identification
Flow Control Valve
Unlocking the Valve Handle fromthe Closed Position
Safety Shut-Off Valve Operation
Safety Shut-Off Valve Test
Manual Override of Safety Shut-OffValve
Slow Close Valve Feature
Folding Legs
Carbide Spikes
Pivoting Inlet
Outlet Pivots
Elevation Holding Mechanism
Flows and Pressures
Automatic, Fixed, and Selectable FlowNozzles
Stacked Tips or Smoothbore Nozzles
Stream Straighteners
Use with Foam
Use with Salt Water
Blitzfire Pressure Loss
Oscillating Blitzfire Pressure Loss
Deployment of Blitzfire
Carrying with an Uncharged Hose
Advancing with a Charged Hose
Anchoring
Anchoring by Weight
Anchoring by Spike Holds
Anchoring by Hooking Legs
Anchoring by Tying Off
OSC Oscillating Unit
Safety - Oscillator
General - Oscillator
Control Identification - Oscillator
Use - Oscillator
Storage
Maintenance
Warranty
Exploded View and Parts List
Safety Mechanism
Blitzfire Monitor
Oscillator
Operation Checklist
TABLE OF CONTENTS
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06
The member companies of FEMSA that provide emergency responseequipment and services want responders to know and understand thefollowing:
1. Firefighting and Emergency Response are inherently dangerousactivities requiring proper training in their hazards and the use ofextreme caution at all times.
2. It is your responsibility to read and understand any user’s instructionsprovided with any piece of equipment you may be called upon to use.
3. It is your responsibility to know that you have been properly trained inFirefighting and /or Emergency Response and in the use, precautions,and care of any equipment you may be called upon to use.
4. It is your responsibility to be in proper physical condition and tomaintain the personal skill level required to operate any equipment youmay be called upon to use.
5. It is your responsibility to know that your equipment is in operablecondition and has been maintained in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.
6. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in death, burns or othersevere injury.
DANGERPERSONAL RESPONSIBILITY CODE
Fire and Emergency Manufacturers and Services Association, Inc.P.O. Box 147, Lynnfield, MA 01940 • www.FEMSA.org
FEMSA
173
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
This equipment is intended for use by trained personnel for firefighting. Its use for other purposes
may involve hazards not addressed by this manual. Seek appropriate guidance and training to
reduce risk of injury.
An out of control monitor can cause injury or death. To reduce the risk of instability, do not attempt
to move the monitor with water flowing.
Interrupting flow to the monitor may cause injury or death. Avoid situations that may interrupt flow
to the monitor such as: hose line kinks, traffic running over hose, and automatic doors or devices
that can pinch the hose.
Master streams are powerful and capable of causing injury and property damage. Make sure the
monitor is pointing in a safe direction before water to the nozzle is turned on. Use care in directing
the stream.
Monitor must be properly connected to hose and nozzle. Mismatched or damaged threads may
cause leaking or uncoupling under pressure and could cause injury.
Do not couple aluminum to brass. Dissimilar metal coupled together can cause galvanic corrosion
that can result in inability to unscrew threads or complete loss of thread engagement over time.
3
2.1 BLITZFIRE PART IDENTIFICATION
Figure 2.1.1 identifies the various parts and controls of the Blitzfire Portable Monitor.
Figure 2.1.1 Blitzfire Parts and Controls
Elevation Holding
Mechanism
Valve Handle
Serial Number
Carbide Tipped Spike
Folding Leg
Handle
Locking
Knob
Tie Off Point
Pivoting Outlet
Pivoting Inlet
Oscillating Unit
(see page 13)
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005
2.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
The Blitzfire is a simple, light and easy to maneuver portable monitor. The monitor has a revolutionary safety shut-off valve, whichwill shut-off the water flow in the event of sudden movement by the monitor. This safety feature reduces the risk of injury from anout of control master stream device. General product specifications are as follows:
• Standard Inlet Coupling: 2 ½ inch NH Female
• Standard Outlet: 2 ½ inch NH male
• Flow range: up to 500 GPM (2000 LPM)
• Maximum inlet pressure: 175 PSI (12 BAR)
• Elevation angle: 10 to 50 degrees above horizontal
• Horizontal angle: 20 degrees either side of center
• Size, legs folded: 25.5"Lx8.1"Wx10"H(650x210x260mm)
• Size, legs unfolded: 26"Lx34”Wx10" H(660x1020x260mm)
• Weight: 22 lbs (10 kg)
LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06174
2.2 FLOW CONTROL VALVE
The Blitzfire has a valve that can be used to control the flow and acts as a safety shut-off feature. The valve is shut-off when thevalve handle is fully forward. The valve is fully on when the valve handle is fully back. The valve can be opened to any of sixdetented flow positions. These detented positions allow the monitor operator to regulate the flow depending on the need or whatcan be safely and effectively handled. Figure 2.2 illustrates the positions of the valve handle.
Figure 2.2 Valve Handle Positions
Detent Flow Positions
LOCKED
CLOSEDON
Pull Knob To Unlock Handle
4
2.2.1 UNLOCKING THE VALVE HANDLE FROM THE CLOSED POSITION
The valve handle is locked in the closed position so that the valve handle may be used to carry the Blitzfire without the valveinadvertently opening. To unlock the valve handle from the closed position:
1. Pull knob on right side of valve handle.2. While pulling on knob, open the valve with other hand.
As soon as valve is opened the knob may be released. Valve handle may be moved to any detent valve position by pushing orpulling on the valve handle. When the valve is closed the valve handle automatically locks and must be unlocked again to reopen.The valve opening procedure is shown in figure 2.2.1.
Figure 2.2.1 Valve Opening Procedure
Pull Knob
Open ValveblitzfirePersonal Portable Monitor
Task Force Tips, Inc. • 2800 East Evans Avenue
Valparaiso, IN 46383-6940
800.348.2686 • 219.462.6161
• www.tft.comXL670
Patents Pending
DANGERRead instruction manual before use. Operation of this
device without understanding the manual and
receiving proper training is dangerous and is a misuse
of this equipment.
Risk of sliding increases at low elevation angles. To
reduce risk of injury or death from sliding, test safety
shut-off valve before using.
OPERATING
MAXIMUMS
FLOW -
500 GPM
2000 L/MN
PRESSURE -
175 PSI / 12 BAR
•
•
LOCKEDCLOSED
OPEN
PULLTO
UNLOCKHANDLE
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06175
The Blitzfire is equipped with a Safety Shut-Off Valve. The Safety Shut-Off Valve will shut off the monitor's flow if the monitor startsto move. The Safety Shut-Off Valve relies on acceleration of the Blitzfire as the signal to activate. It activates at approximately oneG of sideways acceleration. Placing the Blitzfire on tilted surfaces (greater than 10 degrees) may inhibit the resetting of the SafetyShut-Off Valve. The hose connected to the Blitzfire should contain any forward or backwards motion to safe levels.
Safety shut-off valve operation:1. Set up monitor and charge the hose.2.3.4.5. If the monitor starts to slide, the safety valve will sense the movement and release the valve.
• An internal spring and water pressure will move the valve forward to the closed position andshut off the water flow.
• The valve handle will lock in the closed position.6. The safety shut-off valve will automatically reset.7. After the cause of the sliding has been corrected, reopen the valve as outlined in step 3.
If the safety shut-off valve fails to reset, the valve will not remain open. Failure to reset may be due to placing the monitor on anexcessively sloped surface.
NOTE: To make the Blitzfire not shut off completely, see the card titled "Instructions to Maintain Minimal Water Flow
When the Safety Shut-off Activates". (LIX-640)
IMPORTANT: Valve must be fully closed to reset the safety shut-off mechanism. Once tripped the valve handle will not
stay open unless the mechanism is reset by fully closing the valve.
Point the nozzle in the desired direction.Open the valve by pulling the locking pin and pulling back on the valve handle (see section 2.2.1)Place the valve handle in the desired detent position (further back for more flow, further forward for less).
2.2.2 SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVE OPERATION
5
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Improper repairs may result in a malfunctioning safety shut-off valve. If repair is needed on the
safety shut-off valve, return the monitor to Task Force Tips.
The safety shut-off valve is only sensitive to sideways acceleration of the monitor. Keep the hose
directly behind the monitor to reduce potential acceleration in the forward and backward direction.
Do not loop hose in front of monitor.
The safety shut-off valve needs approximately one G of sideways acceleration to activate. At low
accelerations the monitor may travel several yards (meters) and gain enough velocity to cause
injury before the safety shut-off valve activates. Personnel several feet away and in the potential
path of a sliding monitor are at risk of injury. Keep non operating personnel out of the potential path
of a sliding monitor.
2.2.3 SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVE TEST
With hose uncharged and Blitzfire on a level surface:1. Open the Valve Handle to the fully open position.2. Grasp the monitor and give it a sideways jerk or a hit with a gloved fist.3. The Valve Handle should move to about ¾ closed.Note: With water flowing the valve has additional forces on it that will close the valve the rest of the way.
If the Safety Shut-Off Valve fails the test, return the monitor to Task Force Tips to restore proper functioning of the safety shut-offvalve. If the monitor is used before repair, the user accepts the risk of an out of control monitor.
To avoid injury or death, test safety shut-off valve before each use.
Injury or death from an out of control monitor can occur. If monitor gets out of control retreat from
monitor immediately. Do not attempt to regain control of monitor while it is flowing.
The safety shut-off valve is intended to shut off the monitor when it moves. It will not prevent it from
moving. The device will limit the motion and injury that may occur once the monitor starts to move.
Use adequate means to secure the monitor to prevent injury.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06176
The safety shut-off valve may malfunction from: To minimize the risk of an out of control monitor:
• Damage to or tampering with valve mechanism• Lack of maintenance• Debris becoming stuck while flowing water• Ice or dirt build-up on valve parts
• Test Safety Shut-Off Valve before each use.• Tie off the monitor when practical.• Hook legs on stationary objects such as doorframes,
cracks, sign posts etc.• Keep elevation angle as high as practical.• Choose surfaces that allow spikes to dig in.• Assure that the hose is not lifting the spikes off the
ground.• Reduce flow to limit nozzle reaction if stability is
questionable.
2.2.4 MANUAL OVERRIDE OF SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVE
On sloping terrain it may be necessary to manually override the Safety Shut-Off Valve. The Safety Shut-Off Valve can beoverridden by holding the valve handle in an open position.
WARNINGDo not tie or prop open the valve handle. Tampering with the valve handle will render the Safety
Shut-Off inoperable and may result in injury or death.
6
2.2.5 SLOW CLOSE VALVE FEATURE
2.3 FOLDING LEGS
The Blitzfire has a valve damping mechanism to slow valve closure as it approaches OFF to reduce the effects of water hammer.The damping mechanism has a vane moving in a dampening fluid connected to the valve handle on the left side of the monitor.
The Blilzfire has two legs that fold for storage and unfold for operation. The legs are held in the folded and unfolded position byspring detents. To fold or unfold the legs:
1. Grasp the spike end of one leg and pivot it to the folded or unfolded position.2. Repeat for the other leg.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not add or change dampening fluid. Improper servicing may result in a malfunctioning safety
shut-off valve. If service is needed on the slow close device, contact Task Force Tips service
department at 800-348-2686.
In the unfolded position the legs provide a stable base for operation of the monitor. Lack of stability
can cause an out of control monitor resulting in injury or death. Do not operate as a portable
monitor with either one or both legs in the folded position.
2.3.1 CARBIDE SPIKES
The Blitzfire monitor has 3 tungsten carbide tipped spikes on the legs and the base to resist sliding by digging into the surface themonitor is sitting on. The amount of sliding force these spikes can withstand depends upon the amount of downward and sidewaysforce that is on the monitor and the hardness and texture of the surface the spikes are in contact with. At low elevation angles it isdifficult for these spikes to resist sliding. These spikes are essential to safe operation of the monitor and must be in contact withthe ground at all times. Set the monitor on an even surface so that all three spikes contact the ground. Replace any spike if the tipdiameter exceeds 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Order replacement spike kit: XX482-KIT.
WARNING
WARNING
For stable operation the three spikes must maintain in contact with the ground. Do not place the
Blitzfire on top of debris, objects, or uneven terrain that would keep any of the spikes from
contacting the ground.
On hard slippery surfaces the spikes may provide little resistance to sliding. In these cases the
monitor should be tied off or the legs hooked on stationary objects to keep the monitor in position.
Also, a person's weight applied to the monitor may help increase resistance to sliding.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Spikes must be sharp to provide resistance to sliding. Replace any spike if the tip diameter
exceeds 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Spikes are sharp and exposed. Use care around spikes to avoid injury and damage to clothing or
other property.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06177
2.4 PIVOTING INLETThe Blitzfire has a pivoting inlet so that different size hoses can be used without lifting the spikes off the ground. The pivoting inlet also
allows the monitor to be stably positioned on porches, stair landings, and the like. The pivot moves up and down 20 degrees. The
Blitzfire is equipped with three spikes to provide traction when flowing from the ground. For the spikes to provide traction they must
remain in contact with the ground. Assure that the hose is not on top of anything that would cause the spikes to lift off the ground.
Figure 2.5 shows the inlet pivot's range of motion.
7
2.5 OUTLET PIVOTS
2.5.1 ELEVATION HOLDING MECHANISM
3.0 FLOWS AND PRESSURES
3.1 AUTOMATIC, FIXED, AND SELECTABLE FLOW NOZZLES
The Blitzfire's outlet pivots allow for 20 degrees of motion either side of center and elevation between 10 and 50 degrees from
horizontal. Push or pull on the nozzle to redirect the stream. The pivots are easy to reposition under pressure and are good for rapid
redirecting of the stream. However, if the pivot is rapidly bumped against its travel limit, the Safety Shut-Off Valve may activate and shut
off the monitor. Figure 2.5 shows the outlet pivots range of motion.
The Blitzfire has been designed to operate at very low elevation angles to maximize usefulness for interior attack. As with any monitor,
when the elevation angle is low the risk of sliding is increased. This is because at low elevation angles the reaction force is more
horizontal and less vertical.
The elevation pivot has a mechanism to support the weight of a nozzle. It is factory set to support the weight of nozzles likely to be used.
It may be adjusted (see figure 2.5). The mechanism releases when raising the nozzle so upwards drag from the mechanism is not felt.
Avoid the use of long stream straighteners or heavy nozzles which may overcome the holding torque of the elevation mechanism.
The Blitzfire Portable Monitor is designed for maximum flows of 500 GPM (2000 LPM) and a maximum pressure of 175 PSI (12 BAR). Do
not exceed these limits.
A variety of water or foam nozzles may be used with the Blitzfire.
Automatic nozzles maintain a constant pressure by adjusting their opening to match the available flow. Consult the nozzle
manufacturer for maximum flow and pressure ratings. In all cases do not exceed 500 GPM (2000 LPM) and/or 175 PSI (12 BAR).
Figure 2.5 Inlet and Outlet pivots Range of Motion
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
WARNINGAn inadequate supply of pressure and/or flow will cause an ineffective stream and can result in
injury, death or loss of property.
Elevation drag adjusting nut.
Tighten to increase drag. Loosen to
decrease drag. Do not exceed 200 in-lb
(22 N-M) of holding torque.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06178
8
3.2 STACKED TIPS OR SMOOTHBORE NOZZLES
3.3 STREAM STRAIGHTENERS
3.4 USE WITH FOAM
3.5 USE WITH SALT WATER
3.6 BLITZFIRE PRESSURE LOSS
NOZZLE INLET PRESSURE
NOZZLE INLET PRESSURE
NOZZLE
DIAMETER
NOZZLE
DIAMETER
1.0 INCH
1-1/4 INCH
1-1/2 INCH
25 MM
32 MM
38 MM
FLOW
(GPM)
FLOW
(L/min)
FLOW
(GPM)
FLOW
(L/min)
FLOW
(GPM)
FLOW
(L/min)
FLOW
(GPM)
FLOW
(L/min)
FLOW
(GPM)
FLOW
(L/min)
REACTION
(LBS)
REACTION
(KG)
REACTION
(LBS)
REACTION
(KG)
REACTION
(LBS)
REACTION
(KG)
REACTION
(LBS)
REACTION
(KG)
REACTION
(LBS)
REACTION
(KG)
210
330
470
830
1300
1900
270
410
—
1000
1700
—
300
460
—
1200
1900
—
360
—
—
1300
—
—
390
—
—
1400
—
—
80
120
170
40
70
90
120
190
—
60
100
—
150
230
—
80
130
—
230
—
—
100
—
—
260
—
—
120
—
—
50 PSI
4 BAR
80 PSI
6 BAR
100 PSI
8 BAR
150 PSI
10 BAR
175 PSI
12 BAR
FLOW EXCEEDS RATING OF BLITZFIRE MONITOR
Stream quality, especially with smooth bore nozzles, is generally improved with the use of a stream straightener.
The Blitzfire may be used with various foam nozzles and foam solutions. Refer to fire service training for the proper
use of foam.
Use with salt water is permissible provided the monitor is thoroughly cleaned with fresh water after each use. The
service life of the monitor may be shortened due to the effects of corrosion and is not covered under warranty.
Figure 3.6 gives the pressure loss for the Blitzfire Portable Monitor
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
40.0
0 100 200 300 400 500
FLOW (GPM)
LO
SS
(PS
I)
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000FLOW (LPM)
LO
SS
(BA
R)
BLITZFIRE
22 PSI LOSS AT 500 GPM
OSCILLATING BLITZFIRE
34 PSI LOSS AT 500 GPM
Figure 3.6 Blitzfire Pressure Loss
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06179
9
4.0 DEPLOYMENT OF BLITZFIRE
4.1 CARRYING WITH AN UNCHARGED HOSE
4.2 ADVANCING WITH A CHARGED HOSE
It is the responsibility of the individual fire department or agency to determine physical capabilities and suitability for
an individual's use of this equipment.
On a preconnected hoseline the Blitzfire may be carried over the
shoulder with the legs folded as illustrated in figure 4.1.
On a charged hose the Blitzfire may be advanced by holding the valve handle and one of the legs as shown in figure
4.2. Valve handle should be locked in the closed position to keep the valve from inadvertently opening.
Figure 4.2 Advancing the Blitzfire with a Charged Hose
Figure 4.1 Carrying the Blitzfire on an Uncharged Hose
5.0 ANCHORING
The nozzle reaction force on the Blitzfire may be as high as 330 lbs - 500 GPM at 175 PSI (150 kg- 2000 LPM at 12
BAR). This nozzle reaction must be restrained to keep the monitor from moving.
The monitor should be anchored from moving by one or more of these methods:
RISK of MOVING
High
Medium
Medium
Low
METHOD
Anchoring by Weight
Anchoring by Spike Holds
Hooking legs on vertical surfaces
Using a tie off strap
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06180
10
5.1 ANCHORING BY WEIGHT
5.2 ANCHORING BY SPIKE HOLDS
5.3 ANCHORING BY HOOKING LEGS
On surfaces with good traction a person's weight on the monitor and/or hose may be sufficient to keep the monitor from moving.
This is highly dependant on the friction of the surface. The ability to keep one or more than one person’s weight on the monitor is
subject to operator fatigue and may not be as reliable as other methods. Operating at limited flows will reduce the risk.
Anchoring by spike holds is defined as intentionally placing one or more spikes into a crack, hole, or other hold to anchor the
monitor from moving. On hard smooth surfaces such as ceramic tile, smooth concrete, marble, terrazzo, or steel decking the
Blitzfire's spikes may not hold well. Placing the spikes into cracks, expansion joints, or gratings or the like will help hold the
monitor from sliding. Even with the spikes anchored, sliding may be caused by the surface cracking under the load, or from the
hose or nozzle moving the monitor thereby dislodging the spikes from their hold. Figure 4.3.1 shows a close up of a spike caught
in a crack.
The holding ability of the spikes on soft surfaces such as sand, gravel and mud is generally poor, therefore other anchoring
methods should be considered.
The legs on the Blitzfire point back slightly so they can act as a hook for anchoring on posts, walls, door frames or other fixed
objects. Sliding can occur if the legs are unhooked due to the influence of the hose, nozzle, or operator. See figure 4.3.2 for
illustrations of hooking the legs.
Figure 4.3.1 Spike Caught in a Crack
Figure 4.3.2 Hooking Legs to Gain Support
Good
Nozzle reaction keeps leg hooked.
Object is close to hose.
Poor
Nozzle reaction tends to
unhook leg.
Good
Nozzle reaction keeps leg hooked.
Hose hits wall and helps
hold position.
Poor
Nozzle reaction tends to
unhook leg.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06181
11
5.4 ANCHORING BY TYING OFFThe safest method of restraining the monitor is to use a tie down strap. It is inherently more reliable than other methods since it does not
rely on traction or digging in of the spikes. It is also the safest method because, even if the monitor moves, its travel is limited by the
strap. A forward attachment point and a strap are provided with the Blitzfire. A loop on the end of the strap may be placed over the
anchor point or the strap may be wrapped around an object, such as a tree, and the snap end of the strap passed through the loop and
pulled tight. Keep the entire length of the strap as close to the ground as possible. Snap the hook into the hole in the front of the Blitzfire.
The length of the strap may be adjusted by sliding the buckle on the strap. If the strap is too short to reach a suitable anchor, it may be
extended with strong rope or chain. Keep the distance between the Blitzfire and anchor as short as possible. Remove all slack between
the Blitzfire and anchor before flowing water. Figure 4.3.3 shows the elements of tying off the monitor.
Figure 4.3.3 Tying Off of Blitzfire Monitor
6.0 OSC OSCILLATING UNIT
6.1 SAFETY - OSCILLATOR
DANGER
CAUTION
WARNING
WARNING
Do not attempt to modify this oscillating mechanism to fit any other monitor. To do so will cause the
reaction force of the nozzle to be unaligned with the center of rotation. The monitor may spin very
fast with a very high force.
Keep hands and fingers away from the moving parts of the oscillating unit when water is flowing.
There are moving parts that can pinch fingers and hands. Keep the guard in place.
Make sure the Blitzfire is on a firm surface with adequate holding power. As the nozzle goes back
and forth, the reaction force is acting in different directions on the leg spikes. Surfaces such as
asphalt, turf and dirt generally have good holding power. Surfaces like concrete and loose gravel
hold poorly.
Because the nozzle attached to the Blitzfire must slow down, stop and reverse direction at the end
of each sweep, the ends of the covered area will receive more water than the center. If the center
area of coverage needs the most cooling, occasionally narrow the area of coverage or use the
oscillator manually.
An automatic oscillating mechanism is available for the Blitzfire Monitor. The Blitzfire Monitor can be purchased with the oscillating
mechanism factory installed or added at the factory later.
6.2 GENERAL - OSCILLATORThe Blitzfire oscillating mechanism can be used for exposure protection, cooling, or any other situation where it is desirable to
have a monitor sweep back and forth. Like the standard Blizfire, the oscillator operates between 10 and 50 degrees above the
horizontal and 20 degrees either side of center. Flow and pressure ratings are the same as the standard Blitzfire. The oscillating
Blitzfire also has the same trip mechanism as the standard unit.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06182
12
6.3 CONTROL IDENTIFICATION - OSCILLATOR
The oscillating mechanism is driven by a turbine wheel. A worm gear drive reduces the speed and increases the torque of the
turbine wheel. A simple crank mechanism makes the outlet of the Blitzfire and the nozzle attached to it move back and forth. The
horizontal sweep can be set for a 20, 30 and 40 degree sweep. The oscillating mechanism can be uncoupled and the water
stream can be aimed manually. Elevation angle is set the same as the standard Blitzfire.
The speed of oscillation is a function of flow rate, see the Blitzfire Oscillation Speed graph on page 14.
START KNOBSTOP KNOB
SWEEP ANGLE
SETTING KNOB
CONNECTING ROD
TURBINE HOUSING
GEAR BOX
6.4 USE - OSCILLATOR
Deploy the Oscillation Blitzfire as you would the standard Blitzfire, see section 4.0. Align the base of the Blitzfire with the center of
the area you wish to cover
If the nozzle moves freely left to right by hand, the oscillating mechanism is not
engaged. Depress the green START KNOB and move the nozzle from one side to the other until the roll pin drops in the groove in
the connecting rod. Open the valve on the Blitzfire and adjust the elevation to hit the desired spot. The minimum flow is 175 GPM
(650 L/min). To adjust the area of coverage, pull the silver knob and move it left or right until the pointer aligns with the desired
angle of coverage.
To operate the oscillating Blitzfire Manually, depress the Red STOP KNOB and move
the Nozzle to the desired position by hand. The green START KNOB will pop up to indicate the mechanism is disengaged. The
crank and connecting rod will continue to move.
To Engage The Oscillating Mechanism:
To Disengage The Oscillating Mechanism:
SLIDE
PULL
SWEEP ANGLE CHANGE
�
�40° - 30° - 20°
PUSH
& HOLD
SWING
OSCILLATION CONTROL
�
�
STOP�
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06183
13
BLITZFIRE OSCILLATION SPEED
To protect the gears from overload, the oscillating mechanism will
disengage if sufficient force is applied to either side of the oscillator
outlet. The green START KNOB will pop up to indicate the
mechanism is disengaged. See the instructions above to engage
the drive mechanism.
Oscillation speed: The chart shows how many times per minute
the oscillator makes one complete cycle as a function of flow. The
higher the flow, the faster it oscillates.
200’
175’
150’
125’
100’
75’
50’
0’
500 GPM / 1892 Lpm
400 GPM / 1514 Lpm
300 GPM / 1135 Lpm
200 GPM / 757 Lpm
100 GPM / 378 Lpm
FLOW @ 100 PSI / 7 BAR
DIS
TAN
CE
INFEET
20 DEGREES
30 DEGREES
40 DEGREES
WIDTH OF COVERAGE
150’ / 45m
125’ / 38m
100’ / 30m
75’ / 23m
50’ / 15m
COVERAGE AREA OF BLITZFIRE OSCILLATING UNIT
7.0 STORAGEThe monitor may be stored pre-connected to its hose on the optional storage bracket, TFT part number XX-B. The storage bracket
may be mounted on a horizontal surface, or a vertical surface with the nozzle end pointing up or sideways. Mounting instructions
are included with the bracket.
61m
53m
45m
38m
30m
22m
15m
DIS
TAN
CE
INM
ETE
RS
CYCLES/MIN
8
13
21
28
GPM
175
250
375
500
L/MIN
650
1000
1500
2000
APPROXIMATE
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06184
14
8.0 MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST:
• Safety shut-off valve is operational (see section 2.2.3)
• Valve label legible
• Legs pivot freely and detents hold folded or unfolded position
• Spikes are sharp. Replace if tip diameter exceeds 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
• Inlet coupling rotates freely
• Inlet pivots freely up and down
• Pull pin for Valve Handle locking locks and releases easily
• Valve Handle moves smoothly without binding
• Valve Handle stays in detent positions
• Outlet pivots freely from side to side
• Outlet pivots freely upward
• Outlet pivot has sufficient drag to support weight of nozzle
• Tie down strap is in good condition; no frays on strap or damage to hook
The Blitzfire monitor requires little maintenance. The unit should be kept clean and free of dirt by rinsing with water
after each use. Any inoperable or damaged part should be repaired or replaced.
CAUTIONAny alterations to the Blitzfire and its markings could diminish safety and constitutes
a misuse of this product.
Task Force Tips, Inc., 2800 East Evans Avenue, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383 (“TFT”) warrants to the original purchaser of its
Blitzfire Monitor (“equipment”), and to anyone to whom it is transferred, that the equipment shall be free from defects in
material and workmanship during the five (5) year period from the date of purchase.
TFT’s obligation under this warranty is specifically limited to replacing or repairing the equipment (or its parts) which are
shown by TFT’s examination to be in a defective condition attributable to TFT. To qualify for this limited warranty, the
claimant must return the equipment to TFT, at 2800 East Evans Avenue, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383, within a reasonable
time after discovery of the defect. TFT will examine the equipment. If TFT determines that there is a defect attributable to it,
it will correct the problem within a reasonable time. If the equipment is covered by this limited warranty, TFT will assume
the expenses of repair.
If any defect attributable to TFT under this limited warranty cannot be reasonably cured by repair or replacement, TFT
may elect to refund the purchase price of the equipment, less reasonable depreciation, in complete discharge of its
obligations under this limited warranty. If TFT makes this election, claimant shall return the equipment to TFT free and
clear of any liens and encumbrances.
This is a limited warranty. The original purchaser of the equipment, any person to whom it is transferred, and any person
who is an intended or unintended beneficiary of the equipment, shall not be entitled to recover from TFT any
consequential or incidental damages for injury to person and/or property resulting from any defective equipment
manufactured or assembled by TFT. It is agreed and understood that the price stated for the equipment is in part
consideration for limiting TFT’s liability. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above may not apply to you.
TFT shall have no obligation under this limited warranty if the equipment is, or has been, misused or neglected (including
failure to provide reasonable maintenance) or if there have been accidents to the equipment or if it has been repaired or
altered by someone else.
THIS IS A LIMITED EXPRESS WARRANTY ONLY. TFT EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE IS NO WARRANTY OF ANY NATURE MADE BY TFT BEYOND THAT STATED IN THE
DOCUMENT.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
Visit TFT's web site at www.tft.com
9.0 WARRANTY
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06185
15
VB500TO1/2" BALL
XX555PIN
VW360X193-10TEFLON WASHER (2)
XX535PIVOT PIN
(3) PLACES
XX550RELEASE XX540
LEAF SPRINGXX510TEETH
XX560EXTENSION
SPRING
XX570TRIP ROD
XX545RESET SPRING
VT10-24SH500(5) PLACES
XX530PAWL
10.0 EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LISTS
10.1 SAFETY MECHANISM ASSEMBLY VIEW
NOT SHOWN: XX520 RETAINER PLATEVP188X.38HDP SPIRAL PIN
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06186
10.2 BLITZFIRE MONITOR EXPLODED VIEW
16
Fo
rre
pair
info
rmatio
no
nth
e
au
tom
atic
sh
uto
ffo
rth
eslo
w
clo
se
mech
an
ism
,co
nta
ct
Task
Fo
rce
Tip
sat
80
0-3
48
-26
86
.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06187
DE
SC
RIP
TIO
N
2.5
INC
HC
OU
PLIN
GG
AS
KE
T
2.5
NH
CO
UP
LIN
GR
OC
KE
RLU
G
1/4
-28
X1
/2S
OC
KE
TS
ET
SC
RE
W
INLE
TS
WIV
EL
O-R
ING
-23
5
10
-24
1/2
BU
TT
ON
HE
AD
SC
RE
W
CO
VE
RP
LA
TE
SW
IVE
LT
RU
NN
ION
1/4
-28
X1
/2B
UT
TO
NH
EA
DS
CR
EW
HA
ND
LE
TO
P
STA
INLE
SS
WA
SH
ER
1/4
"
LE
FT
HA
ND
LE
3/8
-16
X1
.5B
UT
TO
NH
EA
DS
CR
EW
1/4
-20
X1
.0B
UT
TO
NH
EA
DS
CR
EW
1/8
NP
TP
LU
G
QU
AD
RIN
G4
23
1
DR
AG
DIS
K
RE
AR
SP
IKE
QU
AD
RIN
G-2
27
SLID
ER
PLU
GS
UP
PO
RT
VA
LVE
PLU
G
O-R
ING
-24
1
OU
TLE
T
FR
ON
TLE
G
3/8
-16
X1
/2F
LA
TH
EA
DS
OC
KE
TS
CR
EW
LO
CK
ING
SLE
EV
E
CLU
TC
HT
RU
NIO
N
CLU
TC
HH
OU
SIN
G
D-W
AS
HE
R
BE
LLE
VIL
LE
WA
SH
ER
DE
SC
RIP
TIO
N
1/2
-20
HE
XN
UT
EX
ITS
EG
ME
NT
EX
IT2
.5"
BA
SE
/LE
GA
SS
EM
BLY
CA
MP
IN
DIS
K
PU
LL
PIN
PU
LL
PIN
SP
RIN
G
PU
LL
KN
OB
PU
LL
PIN
HO
US
ING
RIG
HT
HA
ND
LE
3/1
6"
SS
BA
LL
SP
IKE
INS
TR
UC
TIO
NLA
BE
L
SQ
UA
RE
BU
SH
ING
3/8
-24
X1
.75
SO
CK
ET
HE
AD
CA
PS
CR
EW
FLA
TW
AS
HE
R-
PH
EN
OLIC
HA
ND
LE
LA
BE
L
PIN
1/8
X3
/4
O-R
ING
-02
7
NY
LO
NW
AS
HE
R.8
78
O.D
.
WA
VE
SP
RIN
GW
AS
HE
R.7
4O
.D.
O-R
ING
-10
9
CLU
TC
HB
AS
E
NY
LO
NB
US
HIN
G
RA
TC
HE
T
DIR
TS
EA
L
5/1
6X
1S
OC
KE
TH
EA
DS
HO
ULD
ER
PA
WL
40
DE
GR
EE
PA
WL
37
1/2
DE
GR
EE
TO
RS
ION
SP
RIN
G
# 34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
QT
Y
1 1 11 1 1 1 3 4 1 5 6 1 4 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
PA
RT
#
V3
19
0
M3
07
N
VT
25
-28
SS
50
0
XX
60
5
VO
-23
5
VT
10
-24
BH
50
0
XX
20
5
XX
32
0
VT
25
-28
BH
50
0
XX
62
5
VW
68
7X
28
1-5
0
XX
62
1
VT
37
-16
BH
1.5
VT
25
-20
BH
1.0
VF
SP
1M
S
VO
Q-4
23
1
XX
64
5
X4
82
VO
Q-4
22
7
XX
66
0
XX
59
4
XX
59
0
VO
-24
1
XX
42
0
XX
46
0
VT
37
-16
FH
50
0
XX
57
1
XX
32
5
XX
33
7
XX
35
0
VW
1.0
X5
12
-BV
QT
Y
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 48 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
PA
RT
#
VT
50
-20
NT
XX
30
5
XX
31
0*
XX
91
5
XX
61
0
XX
64
0
XX
34
3
X3
45
XX
34
1
XX
35
5
XX
62
0
V2
12
0
X4
80
XL6
70
XX
63
0
VT
37
-24
SH
17
5
VW
1.0
X5
0-0
3
XL6
20
VP
12
5X
75
0H
VO
-02
7
VW
87
8X
25
3-6
2
VW
74
0X
55
0-1
6
VO
-10
9
XX
33
6
XX
33
4
XX
33
3
XX
33
9
VT
31
-00
SB
1.0
XX
33
1
XX
33
2
XX
33
8
# 1 2*
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
32
33
10.2 PARTS LIST BLITZFIRE MONITOR
17
*C
on
su
ltFac
tory
Fo
rS
pe
cia
lTh
read
s.
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06188
10.3 OSCILLATOR EXPLODED VIEW
18
4
2
3
2
1
647
4645
20
44
43
4224413240
38
37
36
35
27
26
25
24
39
14
15
161
7
18
20
19
22
216
10
11 6
13
12
9
87 6 5
23
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
48
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06189
DE
SC
RIP
TIO
N
INLE
TB
ALL
HA
RD
CO
AT
14
7O
-RIN
G
WA
TE
RW
AY
DK
BLU
EP
OW
DE
RC
OA
T
EX
IT2
.5”*
-HA
RD
CO
AT
10
-32
X¼
SO
CK
ET
SE
T
SC
RE
WS
TA
INLE
SS
10
-32
X½
BU
TT
ON
HE
AD
SC
RE
WS
TA
INLE
SS
TU
RB
INE
VA
NE
SH
AR
DC
OA
T
15
3O
-RIN
G
WO
RM
AN
DS
HA
FT
GE
AR
BO
XD
KB
LU
EP
OW
DE
RC
OA
T
CO
VE
R
¼-2
0X
7/8
STA
INLE
SS
SO
CK
ET
CA
PS
CR
EW
WO
RM
GE
AR
WO
RM
SH
AF
TB
EA
RIN
G
SN
AP
RIN
G1
-1/8
INT
ER
NA
LX
.05
11
9O
-RIN
G
SH
AF
TC
AP
SN
AP
RIN
G½
”E
XT
ER
NA
LX
.03
5
CU
PS
EA
L1
OD
X.5
IDX
¼W
IDE
BU
NA
N
1/8
X¾
SP
IRO
LP
IN
CR
AN
KH
AR
DC
OA
T
#1
0W
AS
HE
R
DE
SC
RIP
TIO
N
RO
DE
ND
GU
AR
D
LIN
KS
LID
EH
AR
DC
OA
T
10
-32
X3
/8B
UT
TO
NH
EA
DC
AP
SC
RE
W
3/8
X1
-3/4
STA
INLE
SS
PIN
3/1
6X
1-3
/4S
TA
INLE
SS
PIN
LIN
KT
RIG
GE
RM
AC
HIN
ED
PA
LM
BU
TT
ON
GR
EE
N
10
-32
X1
/2S
OC
KE
TH
EA
DC
AP
SC
RE
W
PA
LM
BU
TT
ON
RE
D
LIN
KR
ELE
AS
E
RE
LE
AS
ES
PR
ING
PU
LL
PIN
PU
LL
PIN
SP
RIN
G
PU
LL
PIN
HO
US
ING
PU
LL
KN
OB
5/1
6-1
8X
5/8
BU
TT
ON
HE
AD
CA
PS
CR
EW
IND
ICA
TO
R
AR
M
NA
ME
LA
BE
L-
OS
CIL
LA
TO
R
TU
RB
INE
SE
AL
5/3
2X
7/8
HD
PS
PIR
OL
PIN
#1
24
37
SLID
EP
IVO
TM
AC
HIN
ED
AR
MS
LID
EH
AR
DC
OA
T
WA
SH
ER
LIN
KM
AC
HIN
ED
# 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
23
24
25
26
27
28
QT
Y
1 2 1 1 2 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 1
PA
RT
#
XX
01
5
VO
-14
7
XX
01
0
XX
02
0*
VT
10
-32
SS
25
0
VT
10
E3
2B
H5
00
XX
02
5
VO
-15
3
XX
03
0
XX
00
5
XX
04
5
VT
25
-20
SH
87
5
XX
04
0
XX
03
5
VR
42
55
VO
-11
9
XX
03
7
VR
42
50
XX
03
3
VP
12
5X
75
0H
XX
05
0
VW
50
0X
20
3-6
0
*C
on
su
ltFac
tory
Fo
rS
pe
cia
lTh
read
s.
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
10.3 PARTS LIST OSCILLATOR
19
QT
Y
1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
PA
RT
#
XX
05
6
XX
07
7
XX
06
6
VT
10
-32
BH
37
5
XX
08
1
XX
08
0
XX
07
5
XX
07
2-G
RN
VT
10
-32
SH
50
0
XX
07
2-R
ED
XX
07
0
XX
07
1
XX
34
0
XX
34
2
X3
50
XX
34
1
VT
31
-18
BH
62
5
XX
06
8
XX
06
0
XL6
10
XX
03
2
V1
90
0
XX
06
7
XX
06
5
VW
81
2X
40
6-6
5
XX
05
5
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06190
Any Blitzfire monitor failing any part of the inspection checklist is unsafe and must have
the problem corrected before use. Operating a Blitzfire that fails any of the above
inspections is a misuse of this equipment.
WARNING
11.0 OPERATION CHECKLISTMonitor must be inspected for proper operation and function according to this checklist before each use. Before
flowing water check:
7) Monitor is anchored:
8) Outlet pivots smoothly in all directions.
1) There is no obvious damage such
as missing, broken or loose parts.
2) Hose and nozzle are securely attached.
3) Both legs are fully open.
4) All three spikes are in contact
with the ground.
5) Valve handle locks when closed
and releases.
9) Safety Shut-Off valve is operational.
(see section 2.2.3)
6) Inlet pivots freely. 10) Monitor is pointed in a safe direction.
• Tied off
• Hooked leg
• Spike hold
• Weight
Locks and
unlocks
TASK FORCE TIPS, Inc. 2800 E. Evans Ave, Valparaiso, IN 46383-6940 USA800-348-2686 • 219-462-6161 • Fax 219-464-7155MADE IN USA •www.tft.com
©Copyright Task Force Tips, Inc. 2002-2005 LIX-630 December 15, 2005 Rev06191
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
™
Fire Eductor
Operating Instructions
www.turbodraft.net
Schutte & Koerting 2233 State Road
Bensalem, PA 19020 Phone (215)639-0900
Fax (215)639-1597 Email [email protected]
192
193
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Table of Contents
Description Page Number
Introduction……..……………………………... 1
Safety Guidelines……………………………... 2
Care and Maintenance………………………. 3
TurboDraft Set-Up……………………………. 4 - 6
Tandem TurboDraft Operations…………….. 7
Strainer Clearing……………………………… 8
Operating Tips…………………………………
9 - 10
Unit Testing……………………………………. 11
Using the Distant Water Source Table…… 12
Unit Specifications……………………………. 13
Notes (Intentionally Blank)…………………... 14 - 15
194
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
FIRE EDUCTORS For many years Schutte & Koerting has provided portable eductors to the U.S. Navy. These eductors were used for fire fighting onboard ships. The units were used to increase the volume of water available for fire fighting. They utilized the high pressure pumps onboard to supply the motive flow to the eductor which was placed overboard. The design of the unit was for high discharge head and typically had a two-to-one flow ratio. (i.e. 100 gpm of motive, 200 gpm of suction, with total flow of 300 gpm.) Over the past several years, Schutte & Koerting has worked with several local fire fighters to develop an eductor designed to be used for rural water supply operations. Many of us take for granted that there is a fire hydrant on every corner. Unfortunately, this is not the case. A large percentage of the fire companies outside large cities depend on lakes, ponds, streams, rivers, and even swimming pools as a water source during a fire. Water is currently accessed from these sources in two ways. The first choice is to maneuver the fire truck close (typically 30 feet or less) to the water source and use the onboard pump to draft. This produces the greatest water flow. In many cases, this is not possible due to weather or access restrictions. The second option is to carry a large portable pump to the water source and use this to draft the water and discharge it back to a pumper truck or portable tank close to and accessible to the fire trucks. Portable pumps large enough to supply sufficient water flows tend to be large and require routine maintenance. Schutte & Koerting has developed an eductor to utilize the third option for water supply. Our eductor utilizes the water stored onboard the fire truck as the motive flow to start the eductor flow and return the motive flow as well as the suction flow back to the fire truck. This allows the fire truck to be at least 150 feet away from the water and still achieve significant net water flow to be utilized for fire fighting. To put the unit in operation, a 2-1/2 inch hose line and a 5 inch LDH supply line are stretched from the fire truck with the eductor to the water supply. The eductor is placed in the water and the motive line is charged to 150 psig. This immediately starts the flow of water back to the fire truck through the 5 inch LDH supply line. Once the suction flow is established, the first portion of the flow is used to replenish the tank water in the truck. Once the tank has been replenished, the water supply has been established and water can be supplied for use on the fire. The unit was designed for 17.5 feet of head and during our prototype testing we were able to achieve 750 gpm net suction gain. We supplied 200 gpm at 150 psig to the eductor, 750 gpm was developed as a suction flow with a total flow back to the fire truck of 950 gpm. 200 gpm of the 950 gpm was being recycled back to supply the eductor. Testing was completed in the Spring of 2000 and marketing began in early Autumn of that same year.
195
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Safety Guidelines
1. Carefully read and follow all operating instructions before putting the TurboDraft unit into service. 2. Be sure all pump operators are properly trained in the correct and safe use of the fire pump that is supplying the TurboDraft unit. 3. Proper personal protective equipment should be utilized while operating any fire pump and while present at any emergency scene. 4. Be sure all hose connections are snug and secure. 5. Use caution at all times around any high pressure pump
connections. 6. Always understand and follow all department rules, guidelines and operating procedures.
196
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Care and Maintenance
The TurboDraft unit is manufactured from aluminum and stainless steel. Little maintenance is required to keep your TurboDraft unit in proper operating condition. 1. Before and after using the TurboDraft, carefully inspect the unit
for any damage to the body, tail, and fire connections. 2. After use, flush the unit with clean water to remove any mud,
sand or debris from the inside and outside surfaces. Be sure to thoroughly flush the 2-1/2 inch connection, as any sand or grit will effect the swivel action. Also, inspect that the screen is free from any obstructions (grass, leaves, etc.). Mild soap and a soft brush should remove any dried mud or soils from the unit.
3. IMPORTANT - Inspect nozzle orifice to be sure there are no
obstructions. Any restrictions within the nozzle will dramatically effect the performance of the TurboDraft unit.
4. Safely store the unit securely on or in the apparatus to avoid
injury to personnel and damage to the TurboDraft.
197
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
TurboDraft Setup/Operation
• The unit requires a 2-1/2 inch discharge line from the fire truck and a 5 inch supply line to return water flow to the fire pump.
• The lines should be stretched from the truck to the water’s edge avoiding sharp bends and kinks.
• Before connecting hoses to the TurboDraft, inspect the unit to be sure no debris has entered the inlet or discharge openings.
• Connect the 2-1/2 inch line to a discharge from the pump and to the TurboDraft unit, as shown below.
• Connect a 5 inch LDH supply line to pump intake valve and TurboDraft unit, as shown below.
• Care should be taken to insure all connections are tight and secure. A rope or webbing may be attached to the handle and secured, however, this is not critical because the unit may be retrieved using the hose lines.
• Submerge in 2 to 3 feet of standing water, with the screen/strainer facing up, 1 to 1-1/2 feet of moving water.
• After the above steps are complete the unit is ready to be put into operation.
198
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
TurboDraft Set-Up/Operation • Engine should be placed into
pump gear and truck prepared for pumping operations.
• The intake valve should be closed.
• Open the bleeder on the suction intake valve to allow any air in the hose to be vented.
• Open the tank-to-pump valve. • Increase the engine pressure to
175 PSIG.
• Open the 2-1/2 inch discharge supplying the TurboDraft unit and maintain discharge pressure at 175 PSIG. This is required to start suction flow back to the truck.
• As the 2-1/2 inch line is charged, the 5 inch line will immediately start to fill.
• Close the bleeder once water reaches it and slowly open the suction intake valve.
• The water supply is now established.
199
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
TurboDraft Set-Up/Operation
• Close the tank-to-pump valve. • At this point the truck’s tank should be refilled. Open the tank fill
valve 1/4 to 1/2 open and allow tank to fill. The truck tank should always be kept full to allow the water supply to be re-established, if necessary.
• With 100 ft. of 5 inch hose, it should take approximately 100-250 gallons of water to establish a water supply to the truck.
• Once tank is full, close tank fill valve. • Slowly open required discharge valve(s). • Maintain the required pressure (see Chart 1, page 12) on the
TurboDraft 2-1/2 inch line at all times. • During the use of the TurboDraft unit, care should be taken not to
exceed supply source availability. This will cause the supply line from unit to collapse. (see Flow Chart 1 on page 12).
• Supply line (5 inch LDH) from the unit should always be monitored. Maximum flow from the TurboDraft unit is achieved when the supply line starts to become soft.
• If the supply line flow is exceeded and the line collapses, simply open the tank-to-pump valve and decrease the discharge flow until the supply line recovers. Once stabilized, close the tank-to-pump valve and top off the tank as soon as possible.
200
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Tandem TurboDraft Operations
* Minimum required pump size: 500 GPM
Set up Operation:
• Set up and establish the first TurboDraft unit as discussed under “TurboDraft Set-Up/Operation” on pages 4-6. Refill the tank.* • Lay out the second unit connecting its 2-1/2 inch charge line to a 2-
1/2 inch outlet and its 5 inch supply line to the truck’s officer side steamer connection.**
• Using the first TurboDraft as a supply, charge the second unit’s 2-1/2 inch supply line. • Once the second unit’s 5 inch line has been bled free of air, slowly
open its suction valve. • Begin water supply operations by slowly opening the required
discharge valves. *The unit with the longest 5 inch line should be set up first and connected to the driver side steamer/intake. **The second steamer must be fitted with a suction valve and air bleeder. A front or rear suction may be used in lieu of the other steamer if a suction of hard sleeve is installed between the 5 inch hose and the suction connection. This is necessary to prevent premature collapse of this line.
201
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Strainer Clearing
During operation of the unit it may become necessary to clear the strainer of grass or debris from the water source. This is easily performed and should only take 15 to 30 seconds.
• Discontinue water supply operations by closing down all discharges from the truck except for the line supplying the TurboDraft unit.
• Open the tank-to-pump valve. • Slowly close the suction intake
valve. This will cause the flow of water to backup into the strainer and clear any obstructions from the screen.
• Keep valve closed for 15 to 30 seconds to ensure the debris is cleared from the strainer area.
• Slowly open the suction intake valve to re-establish the water supply.
• Close tank-to-pump valve and open tank fill valve 1/4 to 1/2 and refill tank.
• When tank is full, close tank fill valve and resume flow operations.
arrow indicates back flow to clear the screen
202
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Operating Tips
• Maintain pump seals per manufacturer’s recommendations and tightly close all valves and bleeders to prevent air leaks and loss of prime.
• Take care to keep discharge flow rates within TurboDraft’s rated
capacity (see Chart 1 on page 12). If you do not, the suction hose will collapse.
NOTE Keep hose lays and lifts as short as possible. The shorter the hose and lift, the greater your flow. • The supply line (or longest supply line if two units are being used)
should be connected to the driver side pump panel. This allows the driver to feel and see the hose. The TurboDraft’s maximum flow is achieved when the supply hose starts to become soft.
• If the supply hose does collapse, quickly open the tank-to-pump valve
to re-establish flow. Then, reduce discharge flow to within units’ capability and top off tank.
NOTE When operating near capacity or under fluctuating discharge conditions, be ready by keeping your hand on the tank-to-pump valve. • If the TurboDraft cannot be adequately submerged, use tennis balls (or
other floating object) or a booster line sprayed above its inlet to break the vortex and prevent air from getting into the pump (i.e., loss of prime).
203
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Operating Tips
• Under heavy algae surface debris conditions, back flushing (shown on page 8) may not be sufficient to prevent clogging of the strainer. Use a booster or forestry line to keep as much algae away as possible.
• If you have a pressure governor, use it. This will help maintain
the constant discharge pressure required to the unit. • TurboDraft use should be regularly practiced and results
confirmed individually as this may vary slightly between trucks and operators.
• The pump’s rated capacity at 150 psi should exceed the
expected flow rate (see Chart 1 on page 12) by 300 GPM. The TurboDraft unit cannot achieve maximum rated flows with pumpers having rated capacities of less than 1,000 GPM.
204
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Unit Testing
• A simple test can be performed to determine the fire flow of a given water source.
• In addition to the TurboDraft setup, connect a master stream device with a straight bore nozzle.
• See page 12 to determine the estimated fire flow for your location and required nozzle bore for deck gun.
• Place the TurboDraft unit in operation as shown on pages 4 thru 6.
• Once the water supply is established, start flowing water to the deck gun and continue to increase water flow to the deck gun until the 5 inch line from the TurboDraft starts to get soft. At this point you have reached the maximum flow.
• Read the pressure at the deck gun. Refer to Chart 3 below to determine the flow for the deck gun at that pressure.
Chart 3
GPM AT VARIOUS PRESSURES (PSIG) Nozz. Dia. 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 66 70 76 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
1-1/8” 206 222 238 252 266 279 291 305 315 328 336 347 357 366 376 385 394 403 412 1-3/8” 308 332 355 377 397 417 435 456 470 490 502 518 533 547 562 575 589 602 615 1-1/2” 366 395 423 448 473 496 518 543 559 583 598 616 634 651 668 685 701 717 732
205
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
USING THE DISTANT WATER SOURCE TABLE
Chart 1
Length of 5” Hose
Lift Pump
Discharge Pressure
Max. Avail.
Fire Flow 10’ 175 psig 670 GPM
50’ 20’ 175 psig 470 GPM 10’ 180 psig 570 GPM
100’ 20’ 180 psig 400 GPM 10’ 185 psig 480 GPM
150’ 20’ 185 psig 325 GPM 10’ 190 psig 440 GPM
200’ 20’ 190 psig 280 GPM
1. Determine the required hose length (use the longer of the two if two
TurboDraft units will be used). Refer to Chart 2 below for friction loss in hose line.
2. Estimate or measure the required lift. This is best done by pre-planning
water source and actual measurement is preferred, as lifts can be visually deceiving.
Hint: Place a pressure gauge on the end of a hose line. Place the gauge at water’s edge and the opposite end of hose at truck elevation. Fill hose with water leaving the truck end open to atmosphere. The lift can be estimated by multiplying the pressure gauge reading (psi) by 2.3.
3. Read across and determine the required discharge pressure for the
TurboDraft’s 2 1/2 inch line and the maximum available fire flow.
Chart 2 FRICTION LOSS / 100 FT. OF 5” HOSE
GPM 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 PSI 1.1 1.7 2.4 3.3 4.2 5.3 6.5 9.3
206
March, 2001 www.turbodraft.net
2233 State Road • Bensalem, PA 19020 tel: (215)639-0900 • fax: (215)639-1597 email: [email protected] • www.turbodraft.net
Specifications
MK NO DESCRIPTION QTY MATERIAL REMARKS
01 FIRE EDUCTOR ASSY. 1 ALUM 5052 H34 003XC21J001 02 BODY 1 ALUM 6061 T6 99E0123J002 03 NOZZLE 1 ALUM 6061 T6 0010113J001 04 TAIL 1 ALUM 6061 T6 98G0137J001 05 INLET PIPE 1 ALUM 6061 T6 75S0083J152 06 FILTER SCREEN 1 SST TY 304 0010112J001 07 BOLTING PLATE 1 ALUM 5052 H34 0010112J001 08 HEX HEAD CAP SCREW 8 316 SST AAA29D20135 09 FIRE HOSE ADAPTER 1 ALUM 001B201J001 5” storz fitting 10 FIRE HOSE ADAPTER 1 ALUM 98S0360J001 2-1/2” NST fitting 11 KEENSERT INSERT 1 SST TY 303 0010124J001 12 HEX HEAD CAP SCREW 2 316 SST AAA26D22135
Net Weight of Unit: 52 lbs.
Distant Water Source Situation 1,2,3
Length of 5” Hose Lift
Pump Discharge Pressure
Max. Avail. Fire Flow
1,2
50’ 10’ 20’
175 psig 175 psig
670 GPM 470 GPM
100’ 10’ 20’
180 psig 180 psig
570 GPM 400 GPM
150’ 10’ 20’
185 psig 185 psig
480 GPM 325 GPM
200’ 10’ 20’
190 psig 190 psig
440 GPM 280 GPM
Note: Using 6” supply line can increase unit output by decreasing line fiction losses.
1 Theoretical, based on test curves of 9/21/99 and hose friction loss per NFPA® Fire Protection Handbook, 15th Edition, Table 17-7H, actual friction losses may vary depending upon hose and coupling design /manufacturer. 2 All flows achievable with 1,000 GPM rated pumper based on NFPA recommended pump curves. Use larger pumper where maintenance/performance is questionable. 3 Minimum available flow from a water source recognized by ISO for grading purposes is 250 GPM. ISO does not recognize drafting sources requiring a lift in excess of 18’. (This is not a drafting device as it operates under pressure.)
207